JP7469062B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a technology has been proposed in which a vibration means is provided on the ball launching handle (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2007-38019 A

The technology described in Patent Document 1 leaves room for improvement in terms of increasing the interest of the vibration-based effects.

This invention was made in consideration of the above situation, and aims to provide a gaming machine that enhances the entertainment value of the game when vibration effects are used.

(A) In order to achieve the above objectives,
A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after the reach effect is started,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
A special vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means during a specific effect period, which is an execution period of the specific effect.
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means during the specific effect period can be executed,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect have different aspects,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The performance control means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance at the first timing in a common manner,
The ratio of the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing being controlled to the advantageous state is different between when the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the common mode and when the special vibration effect is executed in the common mode;
A visual guidance effect can be executed to guide the player's gaze to the operation means in a manner different from the manner in which the operation means is prompted to be operated by the player;
The gaze guidance effect is an effect of illuminating a light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section adjacent to the first light emitting section;
The gaze guidance performance can be executed in a manner in which the first light-emitting unit is illuminated before the special vibration performance is executed, and can also be executed in a manner in which the first light-emitting unit is illuminated during the execution of the special vibration performance ,
The second light emitting unit can be illuminated during the execution of the special vibration performance.
It is characterized by the following.
This configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.
(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) is provided which can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player, and can also be controlled to a normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state)) that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state, and which includes an operation means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates, which includes a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., a variable display a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 for executing the performance process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the performance control pattern, etc.); and a light emission effect execution means (e.g., a light emission effect that causes the operation unit to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect (e.g., lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by a light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., a light emission effect execution means for executing the performance process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203). and a specific effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 which executes the variable display performance process of step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing specific effects (e.g., a reach effect of SP Reach A, a big win confirmation notification, a big win type lottery, etc.) according to the progress of the game, and the rate at which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., depending on the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation unit performance pattern), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 which are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44),
moreover,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of controlling presentation based on control information (e.g., a presentation control command shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
updating means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13) capable of updating a predetermined numerical data from a first value (e.g., "0") to a second value (e.g., "1" or "2") when the number of times that the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (e.g., a period during which consecutive wins have occurred) during which the normal state has never been controlled since the normal state was controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number (e.g., when the number of consecutive wins is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5");
an adjustment means for adjusting the speed at which the game value is awarded in a unit period to be decreased when the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-13 and 14-21, a portion for lengthening the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during a jackpot game by the CPU 103 setting the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the performance control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, after the CPU 103 executes the sending setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162SGS17, the part that executes the command control processing shown in FIG. 5);
The presentation control means is capable of executing presentation control based on control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 and FIG. 14-28, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of identifying the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command in the preview presentation determination process, and determining whether or not to execute a preview presentation during variable display and the presentation type of the preview presentation to be executed using a preview presentation type determination table corresponding to the identified ball output state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, according to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is executed to slow down the speed at which the game value is awarded, so that it is possible to prevent excessive game value from being awarded in a short period of time when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, which would lead to an excessive increase in gambling tendency, and it is possible to execute performance control corresponding to whether the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines that are controlled for a predetermined number of variable display times in a high probability state (high probability state), which is a special state that is more likely to be controlled to a jackpot state that is more advantageous than the normal state, as shown in JP2016-83580A.

However, before the high probability state (high probability state) ends, advantageous states (jackpot states) that are controlled to return to the high probability state (high probability state) repeatedly occur, which can result in a large amount of game balls (the gaming medium) being awarded in a short period of time, posing a problem that could overly stimulate the player's gambling spirit.

This invention was made with an eye on these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent excessive gaming value from being awarded in a short period of time, which could lead to excessive gambling.

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player, and can also be controlled to a normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state)) that is easier to control to the favorable state than the normal state,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of controlling presentation based on control information (e.g., a presentation control command shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
updating means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13) capable of updating a predetermined numerical data from a first value (e.g., "0") to a second value (e.g., "1" or "2") when the number of times that the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (e.g., a period during which consecutive wins have occurred) during which the normal state has never been controlled since the normal state was controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number (e.g., when the number of consecutive wins is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5");
an adjustment means for adjusting the speed at which the game value is awarded in a unit period to be decreased when the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-13 and 14-21, a portion for lengthening the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during a jackpot game by the CPU 103 setting the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the performance control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, after the CPU 103 executes the sending setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162SGS17, the part that executes the command control processing shown in FIG. 5);
The presentation control means is capable of executing presentation control based on control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 and FIG. 14-28, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of identifying the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command in the preview presentation determination process, and determining whether or not to execute a preview presentation during variable display and the presentation type of the preview presentation to be executed using a preview presentation type determination table corresponding to the identified ball output state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the specified numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is made to slow down the speed at which game value is awarded, thereby preventing excessive game value from being awarded in a short period of time when the specified numerical data is the second value, which would lead to an excessive increase in gambling tendency, and since presentation control can be executed in response to whether the specified numerical data is the second value or not, interest in the game can be increased.

The invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention, or it may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a stop symbol determination process. A figure showing an example of settings for the setting suggestion performance execution decision table. A figure showing configuration examples and setting examples regarding setting suggestion patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A diagram showing an example of execution of a setting suggestion effect. A front view of a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine relating to characteristic part 10SH. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic portion 10SH. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the vibration effect and the reliability of a jackpot. A figure showing an example of the execution timing and performance period of a vibration effect and a visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A figure showing an example of the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect. A diagram showing an example configuration of a performance device for characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. A figure showing an example of settings when executing an operation unit performance pattern and a specific linked performance. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing settings of vibration patterns. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance using vibration and light emission. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting a continuous performance pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of setting the timing at which an operation unit performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of control of the operation unit presentation. A figure showing an example of the execution of a presentation in which a game effect lamp is illuminated. A figure showing an example of setting a performance period during which a specific linked performance can be executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a reach performance is executed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of music playback execution. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko game machine. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. A diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading preview effect is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. A figure showing an example of updating the first pending memory display area and the second pending memory display area. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. 11 is an explanatory diagram of a variable display control timer and a movable object control timer. FIG. This is a timing chart for the variable display of Super Reach α1 jackpot and Super Reach α2 jackpot. This is a timing chart for the variable display of Super Reach α1 failure and Super Reach α2 failure. This is a timing chart for the variable display of Super Reach β1 jackpot and Super Reach β2 jackpot. This is a timing chart for variable display of Super Reach β1 failure and Super Reach β2 failure. 13 is a diagram showing the presence or absence of a movable body suggesting operation and the image enlargement ratio during each enlarged display period. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the presentation mode of each movable object action suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the presentation mode of each movable object action effect. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode leading up to a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of a reach presentation in an image display device. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of reach presentation in an image display device in a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a presentation mode of reach presentation in an image display device in a modified example. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine having a characteristic section 162SG. 13A, 13B, and 13C are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the variable display time of each variation pattern and the ball output status flag. A block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a game control data retention area. 1A is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of a data holding area for performance control, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a command buffer received at the time of start winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process in a pachinko game machine having a characteristic section 162SG. A flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control in a pachinko game machine of feature section 162SG. 1A is a flowchart showing an example of a ball output status determination process, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball output status flag value and each adjustment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13A is a flowchart showing an example of a process for determining a random number value when a prize is won, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the contents of a variable category command. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the progress of the jackpot and the opening and closing status of the jackpot opening. An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball output state flag value and each period in the jackpot state. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 1A is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for reserved memories of a jackpot (excluding a special jackpot C), and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a display pattern determination ratio for reserved memories of a miss. (A) is a diagram showing the first pending memory display area and the second pending memory display area, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of updating the first pending memory display area and the second pending memory display area. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a preview performance determination process. A figure showing tables A to C for determining the type of preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display performance process. A figure showing a fluctuation pattern determination table for misses. An explanatory diagram showing a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is selected depending on the value of the ball output status flag.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) is provided that is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning combination ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The winning combination ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have won the second start winning opening (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have won the first and second large winning openings (attackers) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 may display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 500A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a player rotating a ball-hitting operation handle provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or as an effect using any effect device including some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source such as a commercial power source, at 100V AC, can be supplied to electrical components including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12 via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage remains below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change has reached the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko game machine 1 may be configured so that any of a plurality of setting values with different advantages for the player can be set. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a probability variable state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability of determining that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when the game state is a low probability state such as a normal state or a time-saving state.

In the first special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the setting value. In the second special chart display result judgment table, judgment values are assigned so that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state is the same value different from that in the first special chart display result judgment table, regardless of the game state or the setting value. Note that the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be different depending on the setting value. The probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "small hit" and controlled to a small hit game state may be the same regardless of the variable special chart.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot" and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the first special chart display result judgment table and the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a probability variable state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot is set, while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33094 is set as the common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes depending on each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special chart, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33094 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart, when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 32767 to 33421 is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

In the second special chart display result judgment table, when the game state is a special probability state, the range of 32767 to 33421 among the hit judgment values is set as a common numerical range of small hit judgment values for determining small hits regardless of the set value, just as when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state. The small hit judgment value is set to a numerical range that is different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the big hit judgment value regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit judgment value from overlapping with the range of the big hit judgment value that changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The gameplay may be changed according to the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of the probability of the jackpot state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability loop type); when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/200, and the gameplay state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to the probability of the jackpot state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game, while the rate at which the game ball passes through the predetermined switch during the jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V probability type); and when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the gameplay is such that the probability of a jackpot is 1/320, the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the gameplay state is controlled to the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the high base (during time-saving control) (so-called type 1/2 mixed type). When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but a setting may be set in which the probability of a big win or small win is higher than when the setting value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be acquired during a big win game is smaller (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the gameplay is changed according to the setting value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 may be used as a performance switch (a switch for executing a predetermined performance each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a probability variable state or a big win game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 8. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 9 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 8 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. Also, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has not been received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the presentation process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the presentation process flag value is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the presentation process flag value is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation of the features related to the setting suggestion production)
Hereinafter, a description will be given of a characteristic feature relating to the setting suggestion effect in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this characteristic feature, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined rate can be executed while the variable display is being executed.

Figure 10-1 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S171 of the performance control process as the variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting processing, a stop pattern determination processing is executed (step S201). In the stop pattern determination processing, a combination of decorative patterns that are stopped and displayed in the variable display of decorative patterns, such as the final stop pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns, is determined. Following the stop pattern determination processing, a preview performance determination processing is executed (step S202). The preview performance determination processing makes it possible to determine the preview performance included in the advantageous suggestion performance.

After the preview performance determination process is executed, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of multiple patterns prepared in advance (step S203). The performance control pattern may include a special chart change performance control pattern, a preview performance control pattern, and other control patterns for controlling the execution of various performances. For example, one of the multiple prepared special chart change performance control patterns is selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command. Also, one of the multiple prepared preview performance control patterns may be selected and set as the pattern to be used in response to the result of the preview performance determination process in step S202. Note that the special chart change performance control pattern and the preview performance control pattern are not limited to being set as separate performance control patterns, and one performance control pattern corresponding to the combination of execution settings for each performance may be set.

When the performance control pattern is determined in step S203, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control timer setting section) is set in accordance with the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, for example (step S204). Also, settings are made to start the variation of the decorative patterns, etc. on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S205). At this time, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (performance control pattern during special pattern variation) determined in step S203 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control section 123, and the variation of the decorative patterns can be started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

Next, the pending display update setting at the start of the variable display is performed (step S206). For example, in the pending display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, the display part corresponding to the pending number "1" (the display part at the left end) is erased (consumed), and the pending displays in the display parts corresponding to the other pending numbers "2" to "4", etc. are moved (shifted) one by one to the left. This shifts the pending display. In the active display part provided on the screen of the image display device 5, an active display corresponding to the pending display erased (consumed) in the pending display area may be performed. Note that when the number of pending memories is "0", if the variable display is immediately started based on the occurrence of the first start winning or the second start winning, the setting for updating the active display in the active display area may be performed without updating the pending display. After that, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the performance process during the variable display (step S207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S201 of the variable display start setting process as the stopping symbol determination process. In the stopping symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed (step S221). Whether or not a reach performance of a super reach will be executed can be determined based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example.

If the reach performance of the super reach is not executed (step S221; No), the final stop pattern in the case of non-reach or normal reach is determined (step S222), and the stop pattern determination process is terminated. In the case of non-reach, the variable display result is "miss". In the case of normal reach, the variable display result includes the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" and the case where the variable display result is "miss". In the case of non-reach, where the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern is not a reach state, the final stop pattern is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the non-reach combination. The final stop pattern in the case of non-reach is determined to be different (mismatched) decorative patterns in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R. In the case of normal reach, where the variable display result is "miss", the final stop pattern in the case of reach miss is displayed as the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a missed reach is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R. In the event of a normal reach where the variable display result is a "jackpot", the final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is the confirmed decorative pattern of the jackpot combination. The final stopping pattern in the event of a jackpot is determined to be the same (matching) decorative pattern in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R.

When the reach effect of the super reach is executed (step S221; Yes), the final stop pattern at the time of the super reach is determined (step S223). At the time of the super reach, the variable display result may be either a "jackpot" or a "miss." At the time of the super reach where the variable display result is a "miss," the final stop pattern at the time of the reach miss is the determined decorative pattern of the reach miss combination. At the time of the jackpot where the variable display result is a "jackpot," the determined decorative pattern of the jackpot combination is stopped and displayed as the final stop pattern at the time of the jackpot.

During a super reach, regardless of whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss," the same (matching) decorative symbols are displayed as fixed decorative symbols in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The left and right decorative symbols that constitute such a reach miss combination or a jackpot combination are also called reach symbols. The decorative symbols that can be determined as reach symbols may include multiple types of decorative symbols, such as seven types of decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers 1 to 7. The decorative symbols corresponding to the numbers may be only performance images showing the numbers, or may be performance images showing various characters in addition to the numbers. The reach symbol may be determined as one of multiple decorative symbols by referring to a reach symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol. The numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the reach symbol may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122.

In the reach symbol determination table, the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative symbols that become the reach symbols may differ depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the highest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol decreases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the lowest. In contrast, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 1 is the lowest, the determination rate of the decorative symbol increases as the numbers 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are reached, and the determination rate of the decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7 is the highest. In such a determination ratio setting, when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the highest, and as the numbers 6, 5, 4, 3, and 2 are displayed, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state decreases, and when a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 1 is stopped and displayed as a reach pattern, the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state is the lowest. In addition, in the reach pattern determination table, regardless of whether the variable display result is "miss" or "jackpot", the number of judgment values assigned to the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be the same. The number of judgment values assigned to each decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may be different, or the number of judgment values assigned may be the same regardless of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern. The determination ratio of the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern may differ depending on the type of jackpot.

Following step S223, it is determined whether the determined reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224). At this time, if the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7 (step S224; No), the stop pattern determination process is terminated. If the reach pattern is a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7 (step S224; Yes), the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined according to whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect (step S225). The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect may be determined by referring to a setting suggestion effect execution determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121 based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in the RAM 122. The presence or absence of the setting suggestion effect is determined to be either "no effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed, or "effect" in which the setting suggestion effect is executed.

Based on the result of the determination in step S225, it is determined whether or not "effect" has been determined, in which a setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226). If "effect" has been determined, in which no setting suggestion effect is executed (step S226; No), the process of determining the symbols to be stopped is terminated. If "effect" has been determined (step S226; Yes), the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is identified (step S227). The effect control CPU 120 receives a setting value notification command sent from the main board 11 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, and stores the notified setting value in a specified area of the RAM 122. As a result, in step S227, the setting value stored in the RAM 122 is identified.

Following step S227, the setting suggestion pattern is determined (step S228), and the stopping symbol determination process is terminated. The setting suggestion pattern may be determined to be one of a plurality of setting suggestion patterns, for example, by referring to a setting suggestion pattern determination table stored and prepared in advance in ROM 121, based on numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the setting suggestion pattern may be updated using one or both of the random counter and the random number circuit 124 provided in RAM 122.

Figure 10-3 shows an example of a setting suggestion effect execution decision table. For example, in the ROM 121, table data constituting the decision table TA01 shown in Figure 10-3 is stored in advance as the setting suggestion effect execution decision table. In step S225 of the stop symbol determination process, the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect is determined by referring to the decision table TA01. In the decision table TA01, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect varies depending on whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot". For example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the decision ratio of "present" to execute the setting suggestion effect is higher than when the variable display result is a "miss". In such a setting ratio setting, when the setting suggestion effect is executed, the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" and the game is controlled to a jackpot game state at a higher rate than when the setting suggestion effect is not executed. Note that in the setting suggestion effect execution decision table, the number of judgment values assigned to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion effect may be the same regardless of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot".

Figure 10-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a setting suggestion pattern. In this embodiment, four patterns RE-0 to RE3 are provided as multiple setting suggestion patterns. These setting suggestion patterns have different suggestion contents depending on whether the symbol display color is changed and, if changed, the display color. The symbol display color is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped and displayed as a reach symbol, and can be changed to suggestion display colors including copper, silver, and gold in addition to the normal display color red. Pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color and suggests that the expectation level is low, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper, suggesting that the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. Pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver, suggesting that the expectation level is high, which is an advantageous setting value for the player. Pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold, suggesting that the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, in the setting suggestion effect using the reach symbol, it is possible to give suggestions regarding the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 depending on whether the symbol display color has changed and the symbol display color after the change.

Figure 10-4 (B) shows an example of settings for the setting suggestion pattern determination table. For example, table data constituting the determination table TA11 shown in Figure 10-4 (B) is stored in advance in the ROM 121 as the setting suggestion pattern determination table. In step S228 of the stopping symbol determination process, the setting suggestion pattern is determined by referring to the determination table TA11, etc. In the determination table TA11, there are portions where the number of judgment values assigned to the determination result of the setting suggestion pattern differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When a setting suggestion effect using a reach pattern is executed, the reach pattern becomes a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, so there is a high probability of control to a jackpot game state. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-0, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is low, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-1, the setting value is determined to be 2 or more. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-2, the expectation that the setting value is advantageous to the player is high, and when the setting suggestion effect is executed in pattern RE-3, the highest setting value is determined to be 6. In this way, the reach pattern when the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes a reach mode includes a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to a number other than 7, and a pattern display mode that suggests control of the jackpot game state, such as a decorative pattern corresponding to the number 7, and suggests the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. In the case where the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, the reach symbol is displayed in the normal display color to give a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state, and then the symbol display color is changed to continue giving a suggestion regarding control of the jackpot game state and also giving a suggestion regarding the setting value.

The setting suggestion presentation can be executed so that the presentation mode differs depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-1, and the symbol display color is not changed to copper. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 1, the symbol display mode when the reach symbol is a decorative symbol corresponding to the number 7, whether the symbol display color is changed to copper, or not, differs. If the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is other than 6, the setting suggestion pattern is not determined to be pattern RE-3, and the symbol display color is not changed to gold. In this way, depending on whether the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine is 6, whether the symbol display color is changed to gold, or not, differs.

Instead of or in addition to changing the symbol display color, which is the display color of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol, the setting suggestion effect may be to change any aspect of the reach state, such as the shape or pattern of the decorative symbol stopped as a reach symbol. Alternatively, it may be to change the performance mode by any performance device, such as displaying a background image, an outer frame image, or any other performance image, outputting sound from speakers 8L and 8R, lighting up decorative light-emitting bodies such as game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, operating performance movable members, or a combination of some or all of these. The setting suggestion effect and other optional performances in the pachinko game machine 1 may be executable when any data related to performance control, any data not related to performance control, or a combination of these satisfies a single or multiple conditional expressions previously determined for performance execution. A performance that changes the symbol display color is also called a change performance.

The multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns that can be determined only when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and patterns that can be determined even when the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state. For example, patterns RE-0 and RE-1 may be determined at a predetermined rate even when the variable display result is a "miss," whereas patterns RE-2 and RE-3 may be determined at a predetermined rate only when the variable display result is a "jackpot," and cannot be determined when the variable display result is a "miss." In this case, pattern RE-2 may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, whereas pattern RE-3 may be determined at a different rate depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1.

Figure 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing as the variable display performance processing. In the variable display performance processing, it is determined whether or not the special chart fluctuation time, which is the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the performance control process timer (step S241). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S241; No), control is performed to execute various performances as the variable display progresses. The performance control CPU 120 creates various commands based on the control data read from the performance control pattern determined in step S203 of the variable display start setting processing. These commands are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the audio control board 13, the lamp control board 14, etc. This allows a variety of effects to be produced by a given performance device, such as displaying a given performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, outputting a given sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on, off or blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, operating movable components for performance such as the movable body 32, or by combining some or all of these.

In the variable display performance process, it is determined whether or not it is the advance notice performance period (step S242). If it is the advance notice performance period (step S242; Yes), control is performed to execute the advance notice performance (step S243). If it is not the advance notice performance period (step S242; No) or after the control of step S243 is performed, it is determined whether or not it is the reach performance period (step S244). If it is the reach performance period (step S244; Yes), control is performed to execute the reach performance (step S245). By the control of step S245, when the decorative pattern that becomes the reach pattern is stopped and displayed, and then the reach performance is executed after the pattern display color is changed, it is possible to provide suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot game state and to provide suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1.

If it is not the reach performance period (step S244; No) or after the control of step S245 has been performed, it is determined whether or not it is the change performance period (step S246). The change performance period may be determined in advance as a performance execution period in which the pattern display color is changed when a setting suggestion performance using a reach pattern is executed. If it is the change performance period (step S246; Yes), control is performed to execute the change performance (step S247). If it is not the change performance period (step S246; No) or after the control of step S247 has been performed, control is performed to execute performance during variable display, including the variable display operation of the decorative pattern, based on, for example, the settings in the performance control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, and then the variable display performance processing ends.

The change performance period may be set to a different time length depending on the performance mode of the change performance. For example, in the case of pattern RE-0, the change performance period may be set to the shortest first period, in the case of pattern RE-1, the change performance period may be set to the second period longer than the first period, in the case of pattern RE-2, the change performance period may be set to the third period longer than the second period, and in the case of pattern RE-3, the change performance period may be set to the longest fourth period. In general, when a performance that notifies an advantageous situation (advantageous performance) is executed, a player tends to take an image or video of the performance with a mobile terminal owned by the player and post it on a member registration website such as a social networking service (SNS) or an Internet video supply site. However, if the execution period of such an advantageous performance is short, a problem occurs in that an appropriate shooting time cannot be secured. On the other hand, for a performance (unfavorable performance) that is often performed even in unfavorable cases, there is a problem that a long execution period of the unfavorable performance gives a player a sense of discomfort because it does not stimulate the desire to take a photo. Therefore, the execution period of advantageous effects is lengthened to ensure time for shooting, and the execution period of unfavorable effects is shortened to reduce discomfort. This prevents the player from missing an advantageous effect when it is executed, and also ensures time for shooting. Furthermore, by ensuring time for shooting, the player can publish the captured images and videos on the Internet, which can increase public interest in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, in many cases, the images and videos are published, including which pachinko gaming machine 1 at which gaming parlor they were taken, which means that the gaming parlor is advertised by the player. In this way, by ensuring time for shooting when a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is made, a synergistic effect is brought about not only for the player but also for the gaming parlor.

If the variable display time has elapsed (step S241; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S249). If the pattern determination command has not been received (step S249; No), the variable display performance process is terminated and the device waits. In addition, if a predetermined time has elapsed without receiving a pattern determination command after the variable display time has elapsed, a predetermined error process may be executed in response to the fact that the pattern determination command could not be received normally. If a pattern determination command has been received (step S249; Yes), control is performed to derive and display the final stop pattern (determined decorative pattern) that is the display result in the variable display of the decorative pattern (step S250). Next, a certain time is set as a waiting time for receiving a jackpot start command (step S251). In addition, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S252), and then the variable display performance process is terminated.

Figure 10-6 shows an example of the execution of a setting suggestion effect. Figure 10-6 (A) shows an effect execution example HD101 in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is in a reach state and a reach is established. The decorative symbols corresponding to the number 7 are displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, respectively, and a reach is established, and a normal reach reach effect is executed. Figure 10-6 (B) shows an effect execution example HD102 in which a normal reach reach effect transitions to a super reach reach effect, resulting in a reach development. The decorative symbols are displayed in a reduced size on the display screen of the image display device 5, and an effect image in the super reach reach effect is displayed. Figure 10-6 (C) shows an effect execution example HD103 in which a change effect is executed as a setting suggestion effect. An effect display corresponding to the change effect is displayed superimposed on the reach symbol that is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, an effect image announcing a message such as "Change in symbol display color!!" is displayed, suggesting a change in the symbol display color.

Figure 10-6 (D1) shows a performance execution example HD111 in which the pattern RE-0 does not change the symbol display color. Figure 10-6 (D2) shows a performance execution example HD112 in which the pattern RE-1 changes the symbol display color to copper. Figure 10-6 (D3) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-2 changes the symbol display color to silver. Figure 10-6 (D4) shows a performance execution example HD113 in which the pattern RE-3 changes the symbol display color to gold. In performance execution example HD111, the pattern RE-0 does not change the display color of the reach symbol, and it remains the normal display color red. In this way, a failure performance (false performance) in which the symbol display color does not change is executed, suggesting that the expectation level, which is a setting value advantageous to the player, is low. In performance execution example HD112, pattern RE-1 changes the display color of the reach symbol to copper, suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be 2 or higher. In performance execution example HD113, pattern RE-2 changes the display color of the reach symbol to silver, suggesting that the player has a high expectation of a favorable set value. In performance execution example HD114, pattern RE-3 changes the display color of the reach symbol to gold, suggesting that the highest set value, 6, has been confirmed.

In addition to the change effect that can change the display color of the reach pattern, the setting suggestion effect may be an arbitrary effect such as a pseudo consecutive effect or a pre-reading notice effect that suggests the probability of a jackpot and also suggests the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be an effect that can make a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 after making a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state during the execution of the variable display. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then continued, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while suggesting the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. When an arbitrary effect is executed, it may include a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made and then ended, or a case where a suggestion regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state is made while continuing, or a suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The suggestion regarding the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to suggesting the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and may be, for example, a suggestion as to whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. For example, the multiple setting suggestion patterns may include patterns with different determination rates depending on whether or not the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed. When the setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed, a suggestion is made in the presentation mode of a pattern that is determined with a high probability, thereby diversifying the presentation and increasing interest in the game so that the player can recognize that the setting value has been changed.

While the variable display is being executed, suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state may be made, but no suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made. After that, when the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot", suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 may be made in conjunction with the execution of the jackpot start performance (fanfare performance) or the performance during the jackpot (such as the performance corresponding to the first round or second round). There may also be cases where suggestions regarding the setting values of the pachinko game machine 1 are made without making any suggestions regarding control of the jackpot game state.

Instead of some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, or in addition to some or all of the suggestions regarding the control of the jackpot gaming state, suggestions regarding the control of a state that is advantageous to the player and different from the jackpot gaming state may be given. For example, suggestions regarding a probability variable state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be given. In addition, suggestions regarding a state in which any game value that is advantageous to the player is awarded as an advantageous state may be given, depending on whether or not it is controlled.

(Description of Characteristic Part 10SH)
Next, a characteristic feature 10SH of this embodiment will be described.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. For example, as described above, pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH has an operation means that can be operated by the player. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 has a push button 31B that the player can press to give a specific command.

The gaming machine according to feature 10SH is equipped with a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a gaze guidance effect execution means capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the operation means. For example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a gaze guidance effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

The gaming machine relating to the characteristic part 10SH has a higher expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a higher reliability of winning when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed.

The vibration effect execution means of feature section 10SH can execute a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at either of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts and timing T2 when a reach is established, timing T3 after timing T1 and timing T2 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The vibration effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the vibration effect in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether it is either timing T1 or timing T2, or either timing T3 or timing T4.

The visual line guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH does not execute visual line guidance effect at the first timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute visual line guidance effect at timing T1 and timing T2.

The visual guidance effect execution means of characteristic part 10SH can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 and timing T4.

The vibration effect execution means related to characteristic unit 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a visual guidance effect is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from a vibration effect and a visual guidance effect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a reach effect of a super reach.

The vibration effect execution means related to the characteristic part 10SH can execute a vibration effect when a specific effect is being executed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

The gaming machine according to characteristic part 10SH is provided with a display means for displaying information. For example, pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an image display device 5 for displaying various performance images.

The display of the visual guidance effect related to characteristic part 10SH has a lower priority than the display of specified information, and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information. For example, the visual guidance effect image has a lower priority than the constant small pattern, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, and decorative pattern.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 11-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH, and shows the layout of the main components.

The push button 31B is made of a translucent material, and a game effect lamp 9B for game effects is provided inside the push button 31B. With this configuration, the push button 31B can be made to emit light by turning on the game effect lamp 9B.

The push button 31B is configured to be able to vibrate when driven by a vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 is configured, for example, as an eccentric motor in which a weight with an offset center of gravity is attached to the motor shaft, and is provided inside or close to the push button 31B. Note that multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to provide a variety of vibration modes for the push button 31B.

Game effect lamps 9L, 9R for game effects are provided at predetermined positions on the game machine frame 3 below the game area. The game effect lamp 9L is provided to the left of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. Similarly, the game effect lamp 9R is provided to the right of the push button 31B, and extends left and right from the center of the pachinko game machine 1 toward the outside. The game effect lamps 9L, 9R have multiple LEDs built in along the extension direction of the game effect lamps 9L, 9R.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 11-2 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 relating to the characteristic part 10SH.

The display control unit 123 supplies a lamp signal to the lamp control board 14 to turn on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R, and drives the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R based on the lamp signal, turning on/off the game effect lamps 9B, 9L, and 9R in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the lamps to be turned on/off. Note that the control of turning on/off the lamps may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a motor control board 130. The display control unit 123 supplies a motor signal to the motor control board 130 to drive the vibration motor 131 in synchronization with the display of the performance image. The motor control board 130 is equipped with various circuits that drive the vibration motor 131, and drives the vibration motor 131 in a manner specified by the motor signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the vibration motor 131. Note that the control of the vibration motor 131 may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

(Variable display start setting process)
11-3 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process related to the characteristic part 10SH. The performance control CPU 120 executes the process shown in FIG. 11-3 in the variable display start setting process of FIG.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display to be executed and the display result of the variable display to be executed (step 10SHS1). The fluctuation pattern and display result are identified by the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when the variable display starts and analyzed in the command analysis process. The final stop pattern is prepared in advance in the ROM 121 according to a combination of the fluctuation pattern and the display result, and is determined by lottery or the like. Here, lottery refers to a method of determination using a random number value and a table prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The random number value uses one of the performance random numbers updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random number update process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect (step 10SHS2). A vibration effect is an effect in which the push button 31B vibrates. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect that is not linked to a preview effect. In the processing of step 10SHS2, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a vibration effect and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when executing the vibration effect by drawing lots using random number values and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121.

In the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2, the decision value to be compared with the random number value should be assigned to the decision result of whether or not a vibration effect is to be performed and the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is to be performed, so that the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is performed than when the vibration effect is not performed, and the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the execution pattern of the vibration effect when the vibration effect is performed.

Here, the jackpot reliability of a certain effect A is calculated, for example, as follows: (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") / {(probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is a "jackpot") + (probability that effect A will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot") x (probability that the display result is not a "jackpot")}.

Therefore, the table referenced in the lottery of step 10SHS2 only needs to specify the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is a "jackpot" and the probability that the vibration effect of each execution pattern will be executed when the display result is not a "jackpot" so that the jackpot reliability according to the execution pattern of the vibration effect will be a predetermined value.

(Vibration effects and jackpot reliability)
11-4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the vibration effect and the reliability of the big win. The effect control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a plurality of types of vibration effects, which are execution patterns SE1 to SE10, according to a combination of the execution timing of the vibration effect, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration effect.

The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, or timing T2 when a reach is achieved. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved. Also, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1 to SE3 as the vibration effect at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts. Also, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effect of execution pattern SE4 as the vibration effect at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute a vibration effect at either timing T3, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. That is, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a vibration effect at timing T4 when a super reach reach performance is being executed, it does not execute a vibration effect at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. The performance control CPU 120 in this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE5 to SE7 as vibration effects at timing T3 when a normal reach reach performance is being executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE8 to SE10 as vibration effects at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be executed when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, which can increase interest.

In addition, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, regardless of whether it is timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, or timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE1, SE5, and SE8 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE2, SE6, and SE9 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors, regardless of when the vibration effect can be executed. The performance control CPU 120 of this embodiment can execute the vibration effects of execution patterns SE3, SE4, SE7, and SE10 as vibration effects in which the push button 31B vibrates for three seconds and emits light in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when the vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. Also, in this embodiment, the reliability of a jackpot for the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is 100%, and the display result definitively indicates that a jackpot has been displayed.

This configuration allows the user to focus on the color of the light emitted by the push button 31B when it vibrates, and for how many seconds the push button 31B vibrates.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, the reliability of a jackpot differs depending on the timing of execution of the vibration effect. For example, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts than when it is executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed. Also, even if the vibration effect is the same, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when it is executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed than when it is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts.

This configuration can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. Also, if the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols becomes a specified reach state when no vibration effect is executed at timing T1, it can heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed, rather than at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed. And, when a vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T3 when the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, it can further heighten the sense of anticipation that a vibration effect will be executed at timing T4 when the reach performance of the super reach is being executed.

The jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the normal reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of normal reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of normal reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T3 while the normal reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the normal reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of normal reach reach performance.

Similarly, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the reliability of the Super Reach. Furthermore, if multiple types of Super Reach reach performances can be executed and the jackpot reliability differs depending on the type of Super Reach reach performance, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executable at timing T4 while the Super Reach reach performance is being executed may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the Super Reach reach performance being executed at that time, or may be higher than the jackpot reliability of any type of Super Reach reach performance.

With this configuration, the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T3 when the reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, and the vibration effect that can be executed at timing T4 when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, can be used as a chance-up effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the vibration effect is executed in such a manner that the push button 31B is always vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors, and the display result is definitively notified that it is a "jackpot."

This configuration can heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved, rather than timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins. And when the vibration effect is not actually executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it can further heighten the sense of expectation that the vibration effect will be executed at timing T2 when a reach is achieved.

In this way, in this embodiment, the sense of expectation for the vibration effect to be executed can be changed in a complex manner as the display of the decorative patterns progresses.

In addition, by setting the probability of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors to a sufficiently low probability compared to the probability of executing other vibration effects, it is possible to increase the excitement when it is definitively notified that the display result is a "jackpot."

In addition, in this embodiment, when push button 31B is vibrated to produce a vibration effect, push button 31B is always illuminated.

This configuration allows the user to visually recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating, increasing the chances that the user will recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation then determines, based on the result of the determination in step 10SHS2, whether or not to execute a vibration presentation at either timing T3 when the normal reach presentation is being executed, or timing T4 when the super reach presentation is being executed in the current variable display (step 10SHS3).

When a vibration effect is to be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach effect (step 10SHS3; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect (step 10SHS4). An eye-guiding effect is an effect that guides the player's gaze to the push button 31B. In the process of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute an eye-guiding effect by drawing lots using random numbers and a table prepared in advance in ROM 121. In the table referenced in the process of step 10SHS4, the determination ratio for the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect is set regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed. In other words, the effect control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence of an eye-guiding effect at the same ratio regardless of which type of vibration effect is executed this time.

In this way, in this embodiment, when a vibration effect is executed at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed, or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, a gaze guidance effect can be executed.

This configuration allows the push button 31B to be noticed before the vibration effect is executed, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

On the other hand, if a vibration effect is executed at either timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts or timing T2 when a reach is achieved, the gaze guidance effect is not executed.

When the display result is derived and displayed, a "miss" display result may be displayed, and then a rescue effect may be executed, causing the true display result to be derived and displayed. Therefore, even though the display result of the previous variable display is derived and the current variable display has started, if a gaze guidance effect is executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, this may give the wrong impression that a rescue effect was executed in the previous variable display. In contrast, in this embodiment, a gaze guidance effect is not executed at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, thereby preventing such a misunderstanding.

In addition, if a visual guidance effect is executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, it may not be possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state. In contrast, in this embodiment, a visual guidance effect is not executed at the time T2 when a reach is achieved, so that it is possible to properly recognize that the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern has reached the specified reach state.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 11-3, if a vibration effect is not executed at either timing T3 during the execution of a normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of a super reach reach effect (step 10SHS3; No), or after executing the processing of step 10SHS4, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute other effects such as a reach effect, and the type of effect to be executed (step 10SHS5). Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute various effects such as a preview effect, and the type of effect, by a lottery. At this time, the probability of winning is varied depending on whether or not a preview effect is executed and the type of effect, by varying the determination ratio in the lottery depending on the current display result and the current fluctuation pattern. Also, if the current pattern specifies a reach, it is determined that the reach effect specified by the fluctuation pattern will be executed.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the start timing of the performance that has been decided to be executed (10SHS6). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 sets the timer value corresponding to the special chart fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern as the initial value for the performance control process timer, and stores in the timer value storage area of RAM 122 the performance specific data that specifies the type and mode of the performance that has been decided to be executed, and the execution timing specific timer value that indicates the execution timing of the performance by comparing it with the timer value of the performance control process timer, in association with each other. If there are multiple performances that have been decided to be executed, the performance control CPU 120 stores the performance specific data and the execution timing specific timer value for each performance in the timer value storage area.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 supplies the display control unit 123 with an instruction to start executing the variable display of the decorative pattern in the manner specified by the current variation pattern and which derives the determined final stop pattern (10SHS7). The display control unit 123 receives the instruction and starts the variable display of the decorative pattern. At this time, the display of the variable display compatible display may be updated.

Then, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2" (step 10SHS8), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

(Execution timing and duration of vibration and gaze guidance effects)
11-5 is a diagram showing an example of the execution timing and duration of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. As described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts or the timing T2 when a reach is established. Also, as described above, the effect control CPU 120 can execute vibration effects at either the timing T3 when a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when a reach effect of a super reach is being executed.

In addition, as described above, when the CPU 120 for controlling the effects executes a vibration effect at either timing T3 when a normal reach reach effect is being executed or timing T4 when a super reach reach effect is being executed, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a gaze guidance effect before that.

In this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T3 while a normal reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T3, and starts the vibration effect when timing T3 is reached. Similarly, in this embodiment, when the presentation control CPU 120 executes a gaze guidance effect before executing a vibration effect at timing T4 while a super reach is being executed, the presentation control CPU 120 starts the gaze guidance effect 4 seconds before timing T4, and starts the vibration effect when timing T4 is reached. The presentation period for the gaze guidance effect in this embodiment is 5 seconds. Therefore, the vibration effect is executed for the first second while the gaze guidance effect is being executed.

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

(Example of performance)
11-6 and 11-7 are diagrams showing examples of vibration effects and gaze guidance effects. In these examples, a vibration effect is executed at timing T4 during the execution of the reach effect of a super reach.

The performance control CPU 120 is capable of executing multiple types of super reach reach performances. In the reach performance of a super reach, the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the type of super reach. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a background image 10SHY of a "mountain view" is displayed as the background image corresponding to the type of super reach.

In addition, when the reach performance of the super reach is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed when the reach was achieved. In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A), a "left" reach decorative pattern 10SH5L is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L when the reach was achieved, and a "right" reach decorative pattern 10SH5R is displayed, which is a reduced version of the decorative pattern that was stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R when the reach was achieved.

In addition, a small pattern display area 10SHK, which is smaller than the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R, is provided in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, small patterns are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special patterns and decorative patterns. The performance image showing the small pattern is also called the notification information image. Therefore, in the small pattern display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5, a performance image showing the small pattern that is the notification information image is variably displayed, and a performance image showing the confirmed small pattern that is the display result is derived.

In this way, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of a small pattern different from the decorative pattern is performed. During the period from when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts to when the determined decorative pattern that is the display result is derived, the variable display of the small pattern continues in a constant display mode and does not disappear from the screen or be blocked by an obstruction. Therefore, the small pattern display area 10SHK is configured to be always visible, and the player can always see the variable display of the small pattern in the small pattern display area 10SHK. The small pattern variably displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK is also called a constant small pattern or a small pattern for performance. In the small pattern display area 10SHK, for example, a performance image showing a plurality of types of small patterns that are identifiable each other may be variably displayed as a notification information image in a display mode that is partially or entirely common to each of the plurality of types of decorative patterns, such as a pattern showing a number similar to the portion showing a number in the decorative pattern. The small pattern may be displayed only when the decorative pattern is not displayed. For example, after the variable display of the decorative symbols is displayed in a reach mode, instead of the variable display of the decorative symbols, a variable display of a small symbol may be displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (A).

In addition, a fourth pattern may be provided following the special and decorative patterns, and the fourth pattern may be variable displayed in sync with the variable display of the special and decorative patterns. The variable display of the fourth pattern may be realized, for example, by continuing display control that repeatedly displays and hides a specific display color at regular time intervals in a fourth pattern display area provided on or off the screen of the image display device 5. However, when compared with the display result in the variable display of the fourth pattern, the display result in the variable display of the small patterns may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize.

The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a position away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, to the right side of the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the display state of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the variable display of the special symbol is in progress or whether the display result has been derived. In response to this, by performing a variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display area 10SHK provided on the screen of the image display device 5 and deriving the display result, it is possible to display whether the variable display is in progress or whether the display result has been derived in a manner that is easy for the player to recognize.

In this example, a pending display area 10SHH is displayed to display a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display area 10SHA is displayed to display an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. Note that when a reach performance of a super reach is being executed, the pending display area 10SHH and the active display area 10SHA may be hidden.

In addition, a reserved number display area 10SHHS is provided in the left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. In the reserved number display area 10SHHS, similar to the reserved number display area 10SHH, the reserved number of the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is displayed in a specific manner. The display form is a form in which it is displayed in Arabic numerals.

Then, as described above, the presentation control CPU 120 executes the gaze guidance presentation 4 seconds before timing T4 during the execution of the reach presentation of the super reach. As a gaze guidance presentation, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a presentation that uses a visual presentation effect, for example, to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B.

In this example, the performance control CPU 120 first displays a character image 10SHC that resembles a character holding a hammer, and a button image 10SHB that resembles a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character performs the action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the inside to the outside, in accordance with the character's action of swinging up the hammer, as shown in Fig. 11-6 (B) to (D).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 changes the state of the character image 10SHC so that the character swings down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the LEDs built into the game effect lamps 9L and 9R so that the light spot moves from the outside to the inside, in time with the character swinging down the hammer, as shown in Figures 11-7 (E) and (F).

Then, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 changes the appearance of the various images so that the hammer swung down by the character hits the button image 10SHB and multiple "star" effect images 10SHS that resemble stars scatter from the button image 10SHB. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-7(G), at timing T4, the performance control CPU 120 starts a vibration performance, vibrating the push button 31B and lighting up the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Then, one second after timing T4, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the gaze guidance presentation, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (H). After that, when the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration presentation has elapsed, the presentation control CPU 120 ends the vibration presentation, stops the vibration of the push button 31B, and turns off the game effect lamp 9B and the game effect lamps 9L and 9R built into the push button 31B.

Here, the push button 31B is located away from the display screen of the image display device 5, for example, below the play area of the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 11-1. Therefore, a player who is paying attention to the effects displayed on the image display device 5 may find it difficult to check the state of the push button 31B, and may have difficulty in recognizing whether the push button 31B is vibrating or lit up. In response to this, by executing a gaze guidance effect on the screen of the image display device 5 before the vibration effect is executed, it is possible to draw attention to the push button 31B before it vibrates, and the vibration of the push button 31B can be appropriately recognized, thereby sufficiently increasing the interest of the vibration effect.

The priority of the display of the visual guidance effects is set lower than that of the constant small symbols and the reserved number display. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the visual guidance effects in a layer behind the layer that constantly displays the small symbols and the reserved number display.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the constant small pattern displayed in the small pattern display area 10SHK, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the constant small pattern.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed behind the reserved number display shown in the reserved number display area 10SHHS, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, has a lower priority than the reserved number display.

On the other hand, the priority of the display of the eye guidance effects is set higher than the pending display, active display, background image, and decorative patterns. This priority setting can be achieved by displaying the eye guidance effects in a layer that is closer to the front than the layers that display the background image and decorative patterns.

In this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB are displayed in front of the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery," and it can be said that the character image 10SHC and button image 10SHB, which are displays for guiding the viewer's gaze, have a higher priority than the background image 10SHY of a "mountain scenery."

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the hammer of the character image 10SHC is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the character image 10SHC, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (D), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R, and the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the eye, can be said to have a higher priority than the "left" reach decoration pattern 10SH5L and the "right" reach decoration pattern 10SH5R.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the reserved display displayed in the reserved display area 10SHH, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the reserved display.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (G), the "star" effect image 10SHS is displayed in front of the active display displayed in the active display area 10SHA, and it can be said that the "star" effect image 10SHS, which is a display for guiding the viewer's gaze, has a higher priority than the active display.

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring optimal visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display at all times.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 11-6 (B) to 11-7 (G), when the visual guidance effect is being executed, the display of the visual guidance effect and the constant small pattern and the number of reserved items, which have a higher priority than the display of the visual guidance effect, are displayed brightly, and the other displays are displayed darkly.

With this configuration, when the gaze guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the small symbols and the reserved number display can be more optimally ensured at all times, while the visibility of the gaze guidance effect can be made more noticeable.

(Modification of characteristic portion 10SH)
The invention relating to characteristic portion 10SH is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the table referred to in the processing of step 10SHS4 in FIG. 11-3, the determination ratio of the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect may be set according to which type of vibration effect is executed. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may determine the presence or absence of the visual guidance effect at different ratios according to whether the current vibration effect is a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, or a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors. Here, it is easy to execute the visual guidance effect when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red is executed. Also, when the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is executed, the visual guidance effect is always executed. In other words, when the gaze-guiding effect is executed, the execution rate of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability is higher than when it is not executed. With this configuration, the execution of the gaze-guiding effect can increase the expectation of the vibration effect with a higher jackpot reliability.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance may be capable of executing a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance. In this case, as a vibration performance linked with the advance notice performance, multiple types of vibration performance may be executed according to a combination of the linked advance notice performance, the vibration time of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance, and the light color of the push button 31B due to the vibration performance. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a feature advance notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed according to the operating state of the movable body 32. The CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a vibration performance linked with a highly reliable feature advance notice performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated in synchronization with the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B is illuminated in white. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance may be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked feature advance notice performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be a performance that increases the chances of winning in the feature advance notice performance.

The performance control CPU 120 may also be capable of executing a vibration performance linked to other highly reliable preview performances. This vibration performance vibrates the push button 31B in synchronization with the image displayed in the preview performance, and causes the push button 31B to emit white light. In this case, the jackpot reliability of the vibration performance only needs to be higher than the jackpot reliability of the linked preview performance. With this configuration, the vibration performance can be used as a chance-up performance in the preview performance.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 may be one in which the jackpot game state is started when the game ball passes through a specific area provided in the game area of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a specific passing gate or winning hole, after the determined decorative pattern that is the jackpot combination is derived. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a round lottery performance that notifies the player of the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state when the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected. The performance control CPU 120 may also execute a vibration performance linked to the round lottery performance. This vibration performance is a performance in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white when the upper limit number of rounds is notified in the round lottery performance, and notifies the player that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is not the minimum number of rounds among the multiple options. Alternatively, as a vibration effect, when the upper limit number of rounds is announced in the round lottery effect, the push button 31B may be vibrated for three seconds and illuminated in rainbow colors to definitively announce that the upper limit number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot game state is the highest number of rounds among the multiple options. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect linked to the round lottery effect.

The performance control CPU 120 may be capable of executing an error notification process. In the error notification process, when an error command notifying that an error has occurred is received from the main board 11, or when an error is detected in the performance control board 12, an error notification corresponding to the error is executed. In the error notification process, when an error is detected, a process of displaying an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5, or a process of outputting an error notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed. The performance control CPU 120 may display an error notification image corresponding to the error on the image display device 5 while executing a gaze guidance performance. In that case, the display of the gaze guidance performance may have a lower priority than the display of the error notification image. With this configuration, even if a gaze guidance performance is executed when the error notification image is displayed, the visibility of the error notification image can be preferably ensured.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the gaze guidance effect is performed and when the gaze guidance effect is not performed. For example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is performed than when the gaze guidance effect is not performed, it is possible to increase the interest when the gaze guidance effect is performed and the vibration effect is performed. Also, for example, if the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect is longer when the gaze guidance effect is not performed than when the gaze guidance effect is performed, it is easy to recognize that the push button 31B is vibrating even if the gaze guidance effect is not performed.

The vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different before the reference timing and after the reference timing, with a certain timing as the reference. For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be set to 1.5 seconds at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, which is a timing before the timing T2 when the reach is established, and 3 seconds at the timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2, or at the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed, which is a timing after the timing T2. In this way, the vibration time after the reference timing is longer than the vibration time before the reference timing. This configuration can enhance the performance effect when the vibration effect is executed after the reference timing.

The reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be varied depending on the strength of the vibration of the push button 31B. For example, the push button 31B may be vibrated with a first strength and a second strength greater than the first strength, and when the push button 31B is vibrated with the second strength, the reliability of the jackpot of the vibration effect may be made higher than when the push button 31B is vibrated with the first strength. With this configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the strength of the vibration when the push button 31B vibrates.

The execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win may be the same for a first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and a second type of pachinko gaming machine 1 that is different from the first type. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the variation in the execution pattern of the vibration effects and the reliability of the big win executed in the first type of pachinko gaming machine 1 and the second type of pachinko gaming machine 1, respectively, and to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

A vibration effect may be executed as a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the opportunities to execute the vibration effect.

In addition, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is the first mode and when it is the second mode. For example, the reliability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution that is the target of the look-ahead preview may differ between when the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect is a mode in which the push button 31B vibrates continuously for a predetermined time and when it is a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. This configuration can increase attention to the vibration effect as the look-ahead preview effect.

Alternatively, when a vibration effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the execution timing of the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be set to be only executable at any one of multiple timings at which a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress. For example, the vibration effect as a look-ahead preview effect may be executed only at timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed at a timing different from the timing at which a vibration effect as a look-ahead preview can be executed, it is possible to conveniently recognize that a vibration effect has been executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently in progress.

When a vibration performance is executed as a pre-reading notice performance at a timing when a vibration performance can be executed as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed, the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance. For example, when a vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance can be executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to 3 seconds, and the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to 1.5 seconds. Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a notice performance that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display being executed is set to a mode in which the push button 31B continues to vibrate for a predetermined time, and the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance as a pre-reading notice performance is set to a mode in which the vibration is repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. With this configuration, when a vibration effect can be executed as a pre-reading preview effect at a timing when a vibration effect can be executed as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, it is possible to easily recognize which vibration effect has been executed.

When the execution pattern of the vibration effects and the jackpot reliability are common between a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type, the jackpot reliability may be common even if the mode of the vibration effects executed at the specific timing in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the mode of the vibration effects executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1. For example, even if the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the specific effect executed at the timing T2 when a reach is established in the first type of pachinko game machine 1 is different from the illumination mode of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the second type of pachinko game machine 1, the jackpot reliability is 100%. With this configuration, even if the type of pachinko game machine 1 is different, it is possible to increase the expectation that the vibration effects will be executed at the specific timing.

The vibration time of the push button 31B during the vibration effect may be adjusted to match the image of the effect being executed at that time, for example, when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed. For example, when an announcement effect is executed to announce that a reach has been achieved at timing T2 when the reach is achieved, the vibration effect is set to vibrate the push button 31B during the period when the image of the announcement effect is displayed. With this configuration, even when the gaze-guiding effect is not being executed, a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the effect being executed at that time is created, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, only the lower limit of the jackpot reliability may be guaranteed for vibration effects of the same execution pattern. With this configuration, for example, when a vibration effect is executed as an effect to increase the chances of another effect, it is possible to flexibly adjust the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect in relation to the jackpot reliability of the other effect while preventing players from feeling uncomfortable.

The vibration effect may be executed at a timing different from the timings T1 to T4. For example, after the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect can execute a provocative effect that encourages the development of a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability than the reach state after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination. After the provocative effect is executed, there are cases where the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and cases where the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss". When the state develops into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative success effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. On the other hand, when the state does not develop into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability and the display result is a "miss", the CPU 120 for controlling the effect executes a provocative failure effect that notifies the development into a reach state with a higher jackpot reliability as the performance result of the provocative effect. When executing such a provocation effect, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect at the timing when the provocation success effect is executed. This configuration can increase the interest when the provocation success effect is executed.

The vibration duration of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be adjusted to match the image of the teasing success effect. With this configuration, it is possible to further increase the interest when the teasing success effect is executed.

The illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing of executing the teasing success effect may be the same as the illumination color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect of the execution pattern with the lowest jackpot reliability among the vibration effects of multiple execution patterns that can be executed at other timings. With this configuration, when the teasing success effect is executed, even if it develops into a reach state with a high jackpot reliability, the display result may be "miss," but it is possible to prevent the jackpot reliability from being excessively increased.

In addition, when the display result is a "jackpot," the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute a vibration effect immediately before the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern, is stopped. This configuration not only increases the interest in the timing immediately before the fixed decorative pattern is stopped, but also heightens the sense of anticipation for the vibration effect itself, and can increase interest when the vibration effect is executed at other times as well.

When a first type of pachinko game machine 1 and a second type of pachinko game machine 1 different from the first type have the same vibration effect execution pattern and jackpot reliability, the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect can be "rainbow-colored" even when a "jackpot" occurs for a jackpot type other than the jackpot type with the highest advantage among multiple types of jackpot types with different advantages for the player. With this configuration, when the light emitted by the push button 31B during the vibration effect becomes "rainbow-colored," it is possible to avoid the misunderstanding that a "jackpot" occurs for the jackpot type with the highest advantage.

If there are only two types of jackpots that provide players with different degrees of advantage, it is possible to avoid setting an execution pattern in which the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects. This configuration makes it possible to prevent a jackpot of a type that provides a low degree of advantage to the player from occurring even if the push button 31B emits a rainbow color during vibration effects, and thus prevents the player's expectations for the vibration effects from being diminished.

The presentation control CPU 120 may use an auditory presentation effect to guide the player's gaze to the push button 31B as a visual guidance presentation. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may output a specific sound effect when a vibration presentation is being executed, and output the specific sound effect as a visual guidance presentation so that the volume gradually changes from a low volume to a high volume. With this configuration, a player who has difficulty recognizing visual guidance presentations that use visual presentation effects can be directed to the operating means before the operating means vibrates.

When the configuration is such that the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of the same execution pattern may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. For example, even when the vibration effect of the same execution pattern is set, when the setting value is "6", the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect of that execution pattern may be higher than when the setting value is "1". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed and the display result is "jackpot", the expectation of the highly advantageous setting value can be increased.

In the case where the probability of winning the jackpot changes depending on the setting value, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the first setting value is set and when the second setting value is set, which is different from the first setting value. With this configuration, the setting value can be suggested by the vibration effect. For example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is any of "1" to "3" and when the setting value is any of "4" to "6". With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is a high setting that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player. Also, for example, the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect may be different when the setting value is an odd number and when the setting value is an even number. With this configuration, the vibration effect can suggest whether or not the setting value is an even number that may be the most advantageous setting value "6" for the player.

Even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it may be possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red. With this configuration, even at the timing T2 when a reach is achieved, it is possible to draw attention not only to the fact that the vibration effect is being executed, but also to the state when the vibration effect is executed.

If it is possible to execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, even at the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at both the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and the timing T2 when the reach is established. In that case, even if the vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in rainbow colors is not executed at either the timing T1 or the timing T2, the combination of the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T1 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at the timing T2 may be a specific combination, so that the display result is definitively notified as "jackpot". With this configuration, even if the vibration effect that vibrates the push button 31B for three seconds and causes the push button 31B to glow in rainbow colors is not executed when the vibration effect is executed at the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative symbols begins, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation that the vibration effect will be executed at the timing T2 when the reach is achieved, and to further increase attention to the vibration effect at the timing T2.

The vibration effect may be executed at either timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect or timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect. In this case, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed at either timing T3 or timing T4, the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T3 and the execution pattern of the vibration effect at timing T4 may be a specific combination to definitively notify that the display result is a "jackpot". With this configuration, when the vibration effect is executed at timing T3 during the execution of the normal reach reach effect, even if the vibration effect of vibrating the push button 31B for three seconds and illuminating the push button 31B in rainbow colors is not executed, not only can the expectation of the vibration effect being executed at timing T4 during the execution of the super reach reach effect be increased, but the attention to the vibration effect at timing T4 can be further increased.

The vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be different from the vibration time and vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". For example, the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" may be longer than the vibration time of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot". Alternatively, the vibration mode of the push button 31B in the vibration performance in which the display result is not definitely a "jackpot" is monotonous, whereas in the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot", the push button 31B vibrates in accordance with a predetermined rhythm. With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the vibration performance in which the display result is definitely a "jackpot" is a special vibration performance.

When a vibration effect is executed at timing T3 when a normal reach is being performed or at timing T4 when a super reach is being performed, a visual guidance effect may be executed without fail. With this configuration, the sense of expectation that the display result will be a "jackpot" due to the execution of a reach effect can be appropriately increased by appropriately recognizing the vibration of the operating means.

When a vibration effect is executed at either the timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started or the timing T2 when the reach is established, the vibration effect may be executed at either the timing T3 when the reach effect of the normal reach is being executed or the timing T4 when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed. In that case, the execution pattern of the vibration effect executable at the timing T3 or the timing T4 may be restricted so that the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 are not lower than the vibration time and the light color of the push button 31B in the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2, in other words, so that the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T3 or the timing T4 is not lower than the jackpot reliability of the vibration effect executed at the timing T1 or the timing T2. For example, when the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE2 is executed at the timing T1, the execution of the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE5 is restricted at the timing T3, and the execution of the vibration effect of the execution pattern SE8 is restricted at the timing T4. With this configuration, when multiple vibration effects are performed in one variable display, it is possible to prevent the reliability of the jackpot from decreasing.

When it is possible to execute a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the mode of the vibration effect linked to the preview performance and the mode of the vibration effect not linked to the preview performance may be different. For example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the beat of the music played in the linked preview performance. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a reel preview performance, the push button 31B is vibrated in time with the sound effect when the reel operates. Also, for example, in a vibration effect linked to a preview performance, the push button 31B is illuminated in a color different from the illumination color of the push button 31B in a vibration effect not linked to a preview performance. With this configuration, when a vibration effect is executed, it is easy to recognize whether the vibration effect is linked to a preview performance or not.

It may also be possible to execute a present box effect. In this case, when the present box is opened, a character holding a hammer may pop out from the open present box, as shown in FIG. 11-6 (B), and a gaze-guiding effect may be executed. With this configuration, the execution of the present box effect can increase the sense of anticipation for the gaze-guiding effect and the vibration effect.

When an operation performance for operating the push button 31B can be executed, the push button 31B may be lit in this operation performance during the operation valid period during which the operation of the push button 31B is valid, in order to notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In this case, the push button 31B is lit in a manner different from the lighting manner of the push button 31B in the vibration performance. For example, when the push button 31B is lit in the vibration performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for vibration performance in which the push button 31B is continuously illuminated in red for 3 seconds during which the push button 31B is vibrated. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is lit in the operation performance, it may be controlled to be a lighting manner for button operation suggestion in which the push button 31B is switched between red illumination (illumination) and non-illumination (off) every 150 milliseconds during the operation valid period. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the operation of the push button 31B is valid. In addition, during a valid lever operation period during which the operation of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is valid, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A may be lit up to notify that the operation of the operating lever is valid. In this case, control may be performed so that the operating lever of the stick controller 31A is lit up in a lever operation suggestion mode during the valid lever operation period. The lighting mode for the lever operation suggestion may be the same as the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion, or may be a different lighting mode from the lighting mode for the button operation suggestion.

For example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B or the like may be operated by the player to change settings related to the effects, such as the volume setting of the effect to be executed, the setting of the type of music or background to be output, the brightness setting of the image display device 5, the brightness setting of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. Note that, for example, it may be possible to select which effect setting to change from a menu screen, or a different operation may be performed corresponding to the item to be changed by the player, and the setting corresponding to that operation may be changed. In addition, when a special game or the like is not being executed, the push button 31B may be lit to notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed. In that case, the push button 31B in the vibration effect is lit in a different manner from the lighting mode of the push button 31B in the operation effect. With this configuration, it is possible to preferably notify that the settings related to the effects can be changed.

(Explanation of Means Related to Characteristic Part 10SH)
In relation to characteristic part 10SH, a gaming machine has been proposed that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and can execute a vibration effect in which an operating means that can be operated by the player vibrates (for example, see JP 2019-051075 A).

Generally, players play games while looking at the display means on which the variable display and various effects are displayed. Therefore, if the operating means is not within the player's field of vision, there is a possibility that the player will not be aware that the operating means is vibrating even when a vibration effect is executed. In such a case, the interest provided by the vibration effect cannot be sufficiently heightened.

Therefore, in order to draw attention to the gaming means before the vibration effects are executed and to sufficiently heighten interest in the vibration effects, the gaming machine of means 1 relating to characteristic section 10SH is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, etc.), and includes operation means that can be operated by the player (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a push button 31B that the player can press to perform a predetermined instruction operation, etc.), and vibration effect execution means that can execute a vibration effect in which the operation means vibrates (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 can execute a vibration effect in which the push button 31B vibrates, etc.), and is configured to attract the player's attention. and a visual line guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides a line to the operation means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a visual line guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the push button 31B, etc.), and the expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 has a higher jackpot reliability when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing (for example, the effect control CPU 1 20 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started and timing T2 when a reach is established, and any one of timing T3 during which a reach effect of a normal reach is being executed, which is after timing T1 and timing T2, and timing T4 during which a reach effect of a super reach is being executed), and is capable of executing the vibration effect in a common manner regardless of whether it is the first timing or the second timing (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect at any one of timing T1 and timing T2, or timing T3 and The vibration effect can be executed in a manner in which the vibration time and light color of the push button 31B are common regardless of whether the timing is T1 or T4), and the visual guidance effect execution means does not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute a visual guidance effect at timings T1 and T2), and can execute the visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at timings T3 and T4).

This configuration allows the player to focus on the operating means before the vibration effect is executed, and can adequately increase interest in the vibration effect.

The gaming machine of means 2 relating to feature 10SH may be such that in the gaming machine of means 1, the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing the vibration effect when the gaze guidance effect is being executed, etc.).

This configuration creates a sense of unity between the vibration effect and the visual guidance effect, enhancing the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of means 3 relating to characteristic part 10SH may be equipped with a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect different from the vibration effect and the gaze guidance effect in the gaming machine of means 1 or 2 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a reach effect of a super reach, etc.), and the vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the vibration effect when the specific effect is being executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be capable of executing a vibration effect when the reach effect of a super reach is being executed, etc.).

With this configuration, a vibration effect may be performed while a specific effect is being performed, which can increase interest.

The gaming machine of feature 10SH according to means 4 may be equipped with a display means for displaying information in any of the gaming machines of means 1 to 3 (e.g., the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be equipped with an image display device 5 for displaying various presentation images, etc.), and the display of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the display of specified information and a higher priority than the display of information different from the specified information (e.g., the presentation image of the gaze-guiding presentation may have a lower priority than the constant small symbols, the hold number display, and various error notifications, and a higher priority than the hold display, active display, background image, decorative symbols, etc.).

With this configuration, when the visual guidance effect is being performed, the visibility of the visual guidance effect can be made prominent while ensuring the visibility of the specified information.

The gaming machine of feature 5 relating to feature 10SH is a gaming machine of any one of means 1 to 4, in which the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the vibration effect of the first mode and the vibration effect of the second mode which suggests that there is a higher expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than in the first mode (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 3 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red, and a vibration effect in which the push button 31B is vibrated for 1.5 seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in white is executed). (e.g., the reliability of a jackpot is higher when a vibration effect is executed in which the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed), and when the visual guidance effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed than the first vibration effect (for example, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a visual guidance effect is executed, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the push button 31B is vibrated for three seconds and the push button 31B is illuminated in red than when a winning combination is executed).

With this configuration, the gaze guidance effect can be executed, thereby increasing the sense of anticipation for the execution of the second type of vibration effect.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts)
Each feature of the characteristic feature 10SH may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate. The combined feature features or individual uncombined feature features may be combined with a part or all of each feature of the other characteristic features as appropriate.

(Explanation of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
FIG. 12-1 shows a configuration example of the performance device related to the characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK. In this configuration example, a movable body 32 for performance, which serves as a movable performance device, is provided at the lower end front, which is the lower edge part on the front side overlapping with the display screen of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 may be connected to the operation motor via, for example, a link mechanism. The movable body 32 can be changed to an initial position and a position different from the initial position on the front side of the image display device 5 by transmitting power from the operation motor. The movable body 32 may be one whose position can be changed by power from, for example, an operation solenoid or other general actuator.

The movable body 32 has a frame and a window. The frame of the movable body 32 is made of a decorative material and has a configuration that can be covered so that the player cannot see the display screen of the image display device 5. The window of the movable body 32 is made of transparent glass or synthetic resin, or is formed as a simple opening, and has a see-through configuration that allows the player to see the display screen of the image display device 5.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the upper frame lamp 9C, multiple LEDs constituting the left frame lamp 9M, and multiple LEDs constituting the right frame lamp 9N. The upper frame lamp 9C is provided at a predetermined position above the game area in the game machine frame 3. The left frame lamp 9M is provided at a predetermined position to the left of the game area in the game machine frame 3. The right frame lamp 9N is provided at a predetermined position to the right of the game area in the game machine frame 3.

The game effect lamp 9 may include multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and multiple LEDs constituting the button lamp 9B2. The lever lamp 9B1 is composed of multiple LEDs built into the operating stick (operation lever) of the stick controller 31A. The button lamp 9B2 is composed of multiple LEDs provided inside the push button 31B. The operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B may be formed in part or in whole from a translucent material. As a result, when the lever lamp 9B1 is turned on, the operating lever of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated. Also, when the button lamp 9B2 is turned on, the push button 31B can be illuminated.

For example, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are integrally formed, and the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are configured to vibrate when driven by the vibration motor 131. The vibration motor 131 may be provided inside or in a position close to the push button 31B, or may be built into the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or provided at the base position of the operation lever. Multiple vibration motors 131 may be provided to diversify the vibration modes of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A.

In the pachinko game machine 1, an operation section performance including a light-emitting performance accompanied by a vibration performance can be executed as a suggestive performance that indicates that the variable display result becomes a "jackpot" at a predetermined rate and is controlled to a jackpot game state. In the vibration performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in a vibration manner according to the vibration pattern by driving the vibration motor 131. In the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. Note that in the light-emitting performance included in the operation section performance, one of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting one of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. For example, only the push button 31B may be illuminated in association with the vibration performance by lighting only the button lamp 9B2.

Figure 12-2 (A) shows an example of the setting of the operation unit performance pattern used to execute the operation unit performance. In this setting example, operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03, AKC11 to ACK13, AKC21, AKC22, AKC31, AKC32, and AKC41 are prepared in advance as a plurality of operation unit performance patterns. The light emission color, vibration pattern, jackpot reliability, and use are set corresponding to each operation unit performance pattern. The light emission color corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the light emission state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration pattern corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the vibration state when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance. The jackpot reliability corresponding to the operation unit performance pattern indicates the rate at which the variable display result becomes "jackpot" and is controlled to the jackpot game state when the operation unit performance according to the operation unit performance pattern is executed. The uses corresponding to the operation unit performance patterns indicate the timing at which the operation unit performance is executed for each operation unit performance pattern.

The operation unit performance can be executed at multiple times in accordance with the progress of the variable display, such as when the pre-change starts, when the target change starts, when a reach is established, when the reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification tease is given. The pre-change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. The target change starts at a timing corresponding to the start of the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion by the operation unit performance. When a reach is established, it is a timing corresponding to the case where the variable display becomes a reach state. When a reach develops, it is a timing corresponding to the case where a development performance is executed in conjunction with the reach performance of a super reach. The development performance is a performance that notifies the execution of the reach performance of a super reach (reach development) after the reach performance of a normal reach is executed. When a hit/miss notification tease is given, it is a timing corresponding to the teasing performance before the hit/miss notification performance that notifies the execution of whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" while the reach performance of a super reach is being executed.

In the setting example shown in FIG. 12-2(A), multiple operation unit performance patterns that can be used to execute operation unit performances according to multiple timings are prepared in advance. Also, it is set up so that different operation unit performance patterns can be used according to multiple timings at which the operation unit performances can be executed.

When the reach performance of the super reach is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when only the reach performance of the normal reach is executed and the reach performance of the super reach is not executed. Depending on whether the reach performance of the super reach is executed and the fixed decoration pattern of the jackpot combination is derived, it is possible to notify whether the game state is controlled to the jackpot. For the reach performance of the super reach, for example, a plurality of reach performances including the SP reach A may be prepared in advance. Each reach performance may include performances with different performance modes. Each reach performance may include performances with a common performance mode. The determination ratio when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the determination ratio when the variable display result is not a "jackpot" may be set so that the reliability of the jackpot is according to each reach performance. It is only necessary to set the presence or absence of the reach performance, the presence or absence of the reach performance of the super reach, the performance mode in the reach performance, etc. according to the variation pattern determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table using the random number value for determining the variation pattern.

Regardless of the specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game including the variable display, such as reach effects, whether or not the operation unit effects are executed can be determined at a predetermined rate according to whether the variable display result is a "jackpot." Such operation unit effects that can be executed regardless of specific effects are also called standalone operation unit effects. In contrast, there are cases where effects are executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated or vibrated in association with specific effects. Such effects that use illumination or vibration in association with specific effects are also called specific linked effects.

Figure 12-2 (B) shows a setting example when a specific interlocking performance is executed. In this setting example, the light emission color and vibration pattern are set when a specific interlocking performance is executed in conjunction with multiple specific performances, such as the movable body operation, image display, music playback, or jackpot confirmation notification, jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The light emission color in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be illuminated as part of the specific performance. The vibration pattern in the specific interlocking performance is set according to the content of the specific performance, and it is sufficient if the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A can be vibrated as part of the specific performance. In this way, since the specific interlocking performance can be executed as part of the specific performance, the jackpot reliability is common to the specific performance, and a unique jackpot reliability is not set. The vibration of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the specific interlocking performance is included in the special vibration performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance. The illumination of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during a specific linked performance is included in the specific illumination performance that can be executed in conjunction with the execution of the specific performance.

The reach effect of SP Reach A may have a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. The jackpot type selection CH1 may have a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is different from the first jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the smallest (e.g., 4 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH2 may have a selection effect that can be executed when the jackpot type is the second jackpot type in which the number of rounds is the largest (e.g., 16 rounds). The jackpot type selection CH1 and CH2 may be selection effects related to the type of jackpot depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the jackpot game state, or the end condition, or may be selection effects related to the presence or absence or amount of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the jackpot game state, in the jackpot game state. As the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2, when the jackpot game state can be controlled to a certain probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball that entered the V entry port of the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the end conditions of the certain probability variable control. When the small win game state can be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the occurrence of a V entry due to a game ball entering the V entry attacker, a lottery performance may be executed for a small win game state or a jackpot game state with a different degree of advantage depending on whether or not the V entry attacker is open, the opening time, the number of times it is opened, or the number of rounds of the jackpot game state controlled after the occurrence of a V entry.

Until the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released is started, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and then, during the period from the start of the game state in which the V winning attacker can be released to the occurrence of a V winning due to the game ball entering the V winning attacker, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state, and the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled not to vibrate. Then, when a V winning occurs, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state, and a performance including the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be executed. The strong vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is easily detected, and the weak vibration monitoring state is a state in which a vibration error is more difficult to detect than the strong vibration monitoring state. In a period in which there is a high risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the strong vibration monitoring state. In contrast, in a period in which there is a low risk of cheating by a player generating vibration, the state is controlled to the weak vibration monitoring state. When a vibration error is detected, it is sufficient that the performance control CPU 120 can execute control to notify the occurrence of an abnormality, such as displaying an alarm image, outputting an alarm sound, turning on an alarm lamp, outputting an alarm signal, or a combination of some or all of these. When a vibration error is detected, the pachinko game machine 1 may be stopped from playing under the control of the CPU 103 in the game control microcomputer 100. This allows appropriate vibration monitoring and prevents a decrease in interest in the game from being caused by an inappropriate abnormality judgment that results in a vibration error being notified or a game being stopped.

Figure 12-3 shows the vibration pattern settings. A number of vibration patterns are prepared in advance according to the vibration modes of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. Figure 12-3 (A) shows the vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, AKV11, AKV12, AKV21, AKV22, and AKV31 used to execute the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects. Figure 12-3 (B) shows the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 used to execute the special vibration effects included in the specific linked effects.

Vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which on and off periods are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01 that can be executed when the pre-fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC01, the light color of the light effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV02, the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03 that can be executed when the pre-change starts. In addition, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 that can be executed when the target change starts. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from the pre-change start or the target change start. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02, the light color in the light-emitting performance that lights up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration performance is red. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03, the light color in the light-emitting performance that lights up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration performance is rainbow. In the operation unit presentation using operation unit presentation pattern AKC11, the color of the light emitted by the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is white in response to the vibration presentation.

In vibration pattern AKV03, the vibration mode has an on period that continues for 3000 milliseconds. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03 is included in the operation unit effects by operation unit effects patterns AKC12 and AKC13 that can be executed when the target fluctuation starts. On the other hand, the operation unit effects by vibration pattern AKV03 are not included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at a timing different from the target fluctuation start. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC12, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is red. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC13, the light emission color in the light emission effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in association with the vibration effect is rainbow.

In vibration pattern AKV11, the vibration mode during the on period matches the effect AKR1 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV11 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC21, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes pink.

In vibration pattern AKV12, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKR2 when a reach is achieved. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when a reach is achieved. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV12 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach is achieved. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC22, the light color in the light-emitting effect that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes orange.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when a reach is reached, an effect using a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when the reach is reached. For example, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC21 that can be executed when the reach is reached. Also, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC22 that can be executed when the reach is reached. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach is reached and the operation unit effect executed when the pre-change starts or the target change starts. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that an increase in the control burden and control data of the effect can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV21, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the performance AKS1 when a reach develops. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is included in the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 is not included in the operation unit performance that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the light color in the light-emitting performance that illuminates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in conjunction with the vibration performance becomes white.

In vibration pattern AKV22, the vibration mode during the on period is in accordance with the effect AKS2 when a reach develops. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when a reach develops. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV22 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from when a reach develops. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC32, the light color in the light effect that illuminates the stick controller 31A and push button 31B in conjunction with the vibration effect becomes white.

In addition, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach develops, an effect with a common vibration pattern may be executed with the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the time of the reach development. For example, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV02 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC31 that can be executed when the reach develops. Also, a vibration effect with vibration pattern AKV03 may be executed as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect with operation unit effect pattern AKC32 that can be executed when the reach develops. In these cases, there will be cases where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common between the operation unit effect executed when the reach develops and the operation unit effect executed at the start of the pre-change or the start of the target change. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is common, so that the control burden of the effect and the increase in control data can be prevented.

In vibration pattern AKV31, the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds or more. For example, after the on-period continues for 1500 milliseconds, the on-period may continue until the player's action on the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. The vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is included in the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41 that can be executed when inviting the winner or loser. On the other hand, the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV31 is not included in the operation unit effect that can be executed at a timing different from the win/lose notification effect. In the operation unit effect by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, the light color of the light-emitting effect that causes the stick controller 31A and push button 31B to light up in conjunction with the vibration effect is gold.

In addition, when a vibration effect is performed by the vibration pattern AKV31, whether or not to provide an effective detection period may be varied depending on the type of effect performed with the variable display, such as the type of reach effect. When the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. In addition, when the effective detection period is not provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have a light-emitting mode for vibration effect that continuously emits gold light over the period in which the operation lever and push button 31B are vibrated. On the other hand, when the effective detection period is provided, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be controlled to have an operation suggestion light-emitting mode that switches between red light emission (on) different from gold and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds. By executing a light-emitting effect in which the light-emitting mode is switched between light-emitting and non-light-emitting every 150 milliseconds, it is possible to suggest to the player that the operation of the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is valid while executing the vibration effect. Alternatively, the priority of the light-emitting control may be made different by using a plurality of lamp layers in which lamp control data can be set. For example, in the first lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a normal operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is switched between red light-emitting (on) and non-light-emitting (off) every 150 milliseconds. In the second lamp layer, lamp control data is set as a light-emitting mode for suggesting a special operation, in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is continuously lighted in gold for an effective detection period of 5000 milliseconds. Then, the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the second lamp layer is executed with priority over the light-emitting control of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data set in the first lamp layer. This allows the light emission pattern for suggesting a special operation to be prioritized over the light emission pattern for suggesting a normal operation as the light emission pattern for the light emission effect.

The multiple reach effects that become super reaches may include a strong SP reach with a relatively high jackpot reliability and a weak SP reach with a relatively low jackpot reliability. In the reach effect of a strong SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed after a motion detection effect is executed by detecting the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a strong SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode continues for an on period until the player's motion to operate the operation lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is detected during the valid detection period. In the reach effect of a weak SP reach, a hit/miss notification effect is executed without executing a motion detection effect. When a vibration effect corresponding to such a reach effect of a weak SP reach is executed, it is sufficient that the vibration mode by the vibration pattern AKV31 is executed 1500 milliseconds or more before the hit/miss notification effect. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different between the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed and the operation effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed. For example, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 5000 milliseconds, which is the valid detection period. Alternatively, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the strong SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated every 150 milliseconds and an off period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B is not vibrated during the valid detection period. On the other hand, as the vibration effect included in the operation unit effect when the reach effect of the weak SP reach is executed, it may be controlled to a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever or the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds. The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed and the operation performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed. For example, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a strong SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are switched between gold light emission (on) and non-light emission (off) every 150 milliseconds during the valid detection period. In contrast, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance when the reach performance of a weak SP reach is executed may be controlled to be a light emission mode in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are vibrated continuously for 2000 milliseconds to emit gold light.

Vibration pattern AKV41 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the movement of the movable body in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV42 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to the screen display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV43 provides a vibration pattern during the on-period linked to music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Vibration pattern AKV44 provides a vibration pattern in which the on-period continues for 3000 milliseconds or more.

Vibration by vibration pattern AKV41 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes blue along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV42 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the specific linked performance executed together with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the specific light-emitting performance becomes gold along with the vibration of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Vibration by vibration pattern AKV43 is a special vibration effect included in the specific linked performance executed together with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A. In the special linked performance that is executed in conjunction with the music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A, the light color in the special light-emitting performance changes from blue to red to gold in response to the vibration of the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B.

The vibrations caused by the vibration pattern AKV44 may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, or may be special vibration effects included in specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, CH2. In specific linked effects executed together with a jackpot confirmation notification, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH1, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes white as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate. In specific linked effects executed together with jackpot type selection CH2, the light emitted in the specific light-emitting effects becomes rainbow colors as the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate.

Figure 12-4 shows an example of an effect that is executed by vibrating and illuminating the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Here, multiple effect execution examples AKA01 to AKA07 are shown according to the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. Note that the lever lamp 9B1 provided on the operating lever of the stick controller 31A and the button lamp 9B2 provided on the push button 31B only need to emit light with a normal light emission brightness set to a low light emission color so that the light emission color is white in the normal light emission state. Alternatively, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be set to non-illumination so that they do not emit light in the normal light emission state.

In the performance execution example AKA01, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white. When an operation unit performance is executed using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32, the light color becomes white. The operation unit performance pattern AKC01 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a pre-variation. The operation unit performance pattern AKC11 can be used when executing an operation unit performance at the start of a target variation. Both operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performances using the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 all have a jackpot reliability of 50% or more. The operation unit performance using the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV01. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC11 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC31 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC32 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22. The light color also becomes white when the jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed as a specific performance.

In the example of effect execution, AKA02, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red. When an operation unit effect is executed using either operation unit effect pattern AKC02 or AKC12, the light color becomes red. Operation unit effect pattern AKC02 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a pre-variation. Operation unit effect pattern AKC12 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target variation. Both operation unit effects using operation unit effect patterns AKC02 and AKC12 have a jackpot reliability of 70% or more. The operation unit effect using operation unit effect pattern AKC02 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using operation unit pattern AKC12 includes a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03. When playing music for SP Reach A as a specific effect, a performance period in which the light color becomes red is also included.

In the example of effect execution, AKA03, a light-emitting effect is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors. When an operation unit effect is executed using either the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 or AKC13, the light-emitting color becomes rainbow. The operation unit effect pattern AKC03 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a preliminary change. The operation unit effect pattern AKC13 can be used when an operation unit effect is executed at the start of a target change. The operation unit effects using the operation unit effect patterns AKC03 and AKC13 both have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC03 includes a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV02. The operation unit effect using the operation unit effect pattern AKC13 includes a vibration effect using the vibration pattern AKV03. The light-emitting color also becomes rainbow when a specific effect such as a jackpot confirmation notification or a jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

In the performance execution example AKA04, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in pink. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 is executed, the light color becomes pink. Operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC21 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV11.

In the performance execution example AKA05, a light emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in orange. When an operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 is executed, the light color becomes orange. Operation unit performance pattern AKC22 can be used when executing an operation unit performance during reach development. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit performance using operation unit performance pattern AKC22 includes a vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV12.

In performance execution example AKV06, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated blue. When an operation section performance is executed, the light color does not turn blue. When the movable body operation of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light color turns blue. Also, when music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light color turns blue is included.

In the performance execution example AKV07, a light-emitting performance is executed in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in gold. When an operation section performance is executed by operation section performance pattern AKC41, the light emission color becomes gold. Operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be used when executing an operation section performance during a hit/miss notification. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 has a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC41 includes a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV31. When an image display of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, the light emission color becomes gold. Also, when a music playback of SP Reach A is executed as a specific performance, a performance period in which the light emission color becomes gold is included.

In this way, the light emission colors of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance. In addition to the light emission color, any light emission mode, such as the light emission time, the number of times light is emitted (the number of times it flashes), the light emission cycle (the flashing cycle), and the light emission brightness, may be different or common depending on the execution timing of the operation unit performance, the jackpot reliability, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance.

When the operation section performance is executed at the start of the advance variation, it can be executed as a pre-reading notice performance or a continuous notice performance. The pre-reading notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance suggests whether or not the variable display result will be a "jackpot" continuously over multiple variable displays that are executed before the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion. The continuous notice performance can be executed using a continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number. The reserved memory number here may be the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning. As the continuous performance pattern for each reserved memory number, multiple continuous performance patterns are prepared in advance according to the performance mode for each remaining number of times. The remaining number of times is set to the number of reserved special figures at the time of the start winning, and is subtracted by one each time the variable display is executed. Then, when the variable display that is the subject of the suggestion is executed, the remaining number of times becomes "0".

Figure 12-5 shows an example of the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous preview performance. The continuous performance pattern can be determined, for example, by using a random number value for determining the continuous performance pattern, referring to a continuous performance pattern determination table corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and determining the determination result to which a determination value matching the random number value is assigned according to the result of the winning determination.

Figure 12-5 (A) shows the continuous performance patterns AKD01 to AKD06 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "2". In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD01, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC11 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD02, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by continuous performance pattern AKD03, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance by operation section performance pattern AKC12 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD04, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD05, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed. In the continuous preview performance by the continuous performance pattern AKD06, when the remaining number of times is "1", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (B) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "3". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD11 to AKD16, when the remaining number of times is "2" or "1", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-5 (C) shows the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26 that can be used when the number of reserved memories is "4". In the consecutive preview performance using the consecutive performance patterns AKD21 to AKD26, when the remaining number of times is any of "1" to "3", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 is executed, and when the remaining number of times is "0", the operation section performance using one of the consecutive performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is executed.

Figure 12-6 is a flow chart showing an example of a process that can be executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as a pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 12-6, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the pre-reading notice condition is satisfied (step AKS101). The pre-reading notice condition may be set in advance as a condition that enables the execution of a pre-reading notice performance that becomes a continuous notice performance. In step AKS101, it is judged whether the performance control command transmitted at the time of the start winning (starting port winning designation command, reserved memory number notification command, winning time judgment result command) has been received. If no command is received, it is judged that the pre-reading notice condition is not satisfied. If a command is received, the notification content according to the received command is identified, and the winning time judgment result is identified as the notification content according to the winning time judgment result command, for example.

The winning judgment result may be a result of judging whether the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" or whether the variation pattern is determined to be a specific variation pattern by the start winning judgment process executed in step S101 of the special pattern process process using the game random number extracted at the start winning. The winning judgment result may be, for example, any of the following: jackpot, super reach confirmation on miss, reach confirmation on miss, and general on miss. The winning judgment result of a jackpot is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the display result is within the jackpot judgment range and is controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result of a super reach confirmation on miss is a judgment result included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is within the super reach confirmation range on miss, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the variation pattern is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game state is not controlled to the jackpot game state. The winning judgment result for a reach confirmation on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is within the reach confirmation range on a miss. The winning judgment result for a general win on a miss is included in the judgment result corresponding to the case where the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state, and is a judgment result corresponding to the case where the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is neither within the super reach confirmation range on a miss nor within the reach confirmation range.

The pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, the pre-reading prediction condition may be established when the current winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, and all previous winning judgment results corresponding to the reserved memory have been general on a miss. Note that if the pre-reading prediction performance that will result in a consecutive prediction performance is already set to start, the pre-reading prediction condition may be restricted from being established.

If the pre-reading prediction condition is not met (step AKS101; No), the pre-reading prediction setting process is terminated. If the pre-reading prediction condition is met (step AKS101; Yes), it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction (step AKS102). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction may be extracted, and depending on the result of the winning judgment, a pre-reading prediction execution decision table stored in advance in ROM121 may be referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction, thereby determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance. In step AKS102, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading prediction performance, either "no execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is not executed, or "execution" when the pre-reading prediction performance is executed. It is determined whether or not the result of the decision at this time has been determined to be "execution" (step AKS103).

If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is not to be executed (step AKS103; No), the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance is to be executed (step AKS103; Yes), the remaining number of times is set (step AKS104). In step AKS104, the number of reserved memories may be set as the remaining number of times. Next, the consecutive performance pattern is determined (step AKS105). For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the consecutive performance pattern may be extracted, and the consecutive performance pattern may be determined to be one of a number of patterns by referring to a consecutive performance pattern determination table stored in advance in ROM 121 according to the winning judgment result.

After the continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105, a pre-reading preview setting is performed (step AKS106), and the pre-reading preview setting process is terminated. In step AKS106, for example, a pre-reading preview flag provided in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (such as the performance control flag setting section) may be set to the ON state.

In such a pre-reading notice setting process, if the winning judgment result is either a jackpot or a confirmed super reach on a miss, the pre-reading notice condition in step AKS101 can be established, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step AKS102 and the continuous performance pattern in step AKS105. If the winning judgment result is a jackpot, step AKS102 may determine "execution yes" to execute the pre-reading notice performance at a higher rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. Also, in step AKS105, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, the continuous performance pattern may be determined at a different rate than when the winning judgment result is a confirmed super reach on a miss. In this way, it is sufficient that the continuous notice performance that becomes the pre-reading notice performance can be executed based on the winning judgment result that becomes the pre-reading judgment result.

Figure 12-7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing that can be executed in step S171 of Figure 9 as a variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 12-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final stop pattern, etc., which will be the final decorative pattern as the variable display result of the decorative pattern (step AKS201). The performance control CPU 120 may determine the final stop pattern based on the variable display content, such as the variable pattern indicated by the variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the variable display result indicated by the variable display result notification command. The variable pattern designation command and the display result notification command are transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by setting the transmission of the command at the start of the special pattern's variation when the variable pattern setting process is executed in step S111 of the special pattern process process. The variable pattern designation command is a performance control command that designates the variable pattern determined as the usage pattern. The variable display result notification command is a performance control command that designates the variable display result determined using a random number value for determining the special pattern display result. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display results may be "non-reach (miss)", "reach (miss)", "non-probability change (jackpot)", and "probability change (jackpot)".

When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," the variable display state of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach miss combination is displayed stationary, and the display result of the variable display becomes "miss." When the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a time-saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," the display result of the variable display becomes "jackpot," and the game state after the jackpot game state ends becomes a probability change state.

In step AKS201, for example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (jackpot)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same even-numbered patterns is determined as the final stop pattern. Also, when the variable display content is "probability change (jackpot)," it is sufficient to be able to determine a combination of fixed decorative patterns consisting of the same odd-numbered patterns as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When the variable display content is "non-reach (miss)," a combination of fixed decorative patterns that will be a non-reach-miss combination is determined as the final stop pattern. When determining a combination of fixed decorative patterns, for example, numerical data that will be a random number value for pattern determination is extracted, and the stopping pattern of the decorative patterns can be determined by referring to a pattern determination table that is stored in advance in ROM121 according to the variable display content.

After the final stop pattern and the like are determined, the operation section presentation is determined (step AKS202). In step AKS202, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. For example, if the pre-reading preview flag is on, it may be determined that a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed. If a pre-reading preview presentation is being performed, the remaining number of times is subtracted by 1, and the operation section presentation pattern may be determined according to the remaining number of times after the subtraction and the consecutive presentation pattern. The consecutive presentation pattern may be the one determined in step AKS105 of the pre-reading preview setting process, and may be stored in a specified area of RAM 122. If the remaining number of times after the subtraction is "0", the pre-reading preview flag may be cleared to the off state.

In step AKS202, when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is not being performed, the presence or absence of the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display and the operation unit performance pattern may be determined at a predetermined ratio. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the operation unit performance may be extracted, and depending on whether the variable display result is a "jackpot", the presence or absence of the operation unit performance, i.e., whether or not to execute the operation unit performance, and the operation unit performance pattern to be used when executing the operation unit performance may be determined by referring to an operation unit performance determination table previously stored in RAM121. The operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display may be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is not being performed, and may not be executed when it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance is being performed. Therefore, a limit is set for the operation unit performance corresponding to the current variable display so that it cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display within the range of the variable display in which the operation unit performance included in the pre-reading notice performance is executed.

In step AKS202, when a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance is executed in conjunction with a specific performance based on a fluctuation pattern, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted. For example, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at any timing. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that all operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Alternatively, when the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed, it is possible to decide to execute the operation unit performance at a predetermined rate at the timing corresponding to the start of the target fluctuation or the establishment of the reach, while the execution of the operation unit performance may be restricted by deciding not to execute the operation unit performance at the timing corresponding to the development of the reach or the announcement of the hit or miss. In this case, a limiting restriction is set so that some operation unit performances cannot be executed during the execution of the variable display in the range of the variable display in which the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. In addition, within the range of the variable display in which a specific effect is executed, a limit may be set so that some or all of the operation unit effects are difficult to execute while the variable display is being executed. In this way, the effect control CPU 120, which determines the operation unit effects in step AKS202, can limit the execution of the operation unit effects, including the vibration effect, when a special vibration effect is executed.

When the operation unit performance is determined by step AKS202, if a special performance different from the specific performance is executed based on the fluctuation pattern or the result of the judgment at the time of winning, the determination ratio of the operation unit performance may be set so that some or all of the operation unit performance is more likely to be executed during the execution of the variable display than when the special performance is not executed.

After the operation section performance is determined, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of the multiple patterns prepared in advance (step AKS203). For example, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (variable display performance control patterns) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and sets it as the usage pattern. The performance control CPU 120 may also select one of the multiple prepared performance control patterns (operation section performance control patterns) in response to the operation section performance determined in step AKS202, and set it as the usage pattern. In addition, the initial value of the performance control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as the performance control timer setting section) of the RAM 122 is set (step AKS204). Then, the decorative pattern or the like is started to vary on the screen of the image display device 5 (step AKS205). At this time, for example, a display control command specified by the display control data included in the performance control pattern (variable display performance control pattern) determined in step AKS203 can be transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123, thereby starting the variation of the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5.

After the variable start setting has been made, settings are made to update the pending display and the like in response to the start of the variable display (step AKS206). After updating the pending display and the like, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", which corresponds to the performance processing during the variable display (step AKS207), and the variable display start setting process is terminated.

Figure 12-8 shows an example of the configuration of a performance control pattern. The performance control pattern includes a variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) and an operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B). The variable display performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (A) includes control data used to control the execution of various performances from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern, corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command. The operation unit performance control pattern shown in Figure 12-8 (B) includes control data used to control the execution of the operation unit performance.

The variable display performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, vibration control data, and end code. The performance control process timer judgment value is a value (judgment value) that is compared with the performance control process timer value, which is the stored value of the performance control process timer, and a judgment value corresponding to the execution time (performance time) of each performance operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the performance control process timer judgment value, data indicating the timing of switching the performance control, etc., may be set in response to a specified control content or processing content, such as, for example, a specified performance control command being received from the main board 11, or a specified process being executed as a process for controlling a performance operation in the performance control CPU 120.

The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variable mode of each decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the display control data is data that specifies the display operation of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. The audio control data includes data indicating the audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects etc. linked to the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the audio control data is data that specifies the audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating the light emission drive mode of light-emitting bodies such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the lamp control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode of light-emitting bodies during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The operation detection control data includes data indicating the performance operation mode corresponding to the detection of the player's action, such as the effective detection period during which the player's action, such as tilting the operation lever of the stick controller 31A, pointing to the trigger button, or pressing the push button 31B, is effectively detected, and data specifying the control content of the performance operation when each action is effectively detected. The vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern includes data indicating, for example, the on period and drive mode of the vibration motor 131 during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the vibration control data of the variable display performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode of the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B during the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the variable pattern.

Note that these control data do not have to be included in all performance control patterns, and there may be performance control patterns that include some of the control data depending on the content of the performance action by each performance control pattern. Furthermore, for multiple types of process data included in a performance control pattern, the type of control data that makes up each process data may differ depending on the content of the performance action executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data that includes all of the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and vibration control data, and there may be process data that includes some of these. Furthermore, various other control data may be included, such as movable body control data that indicates the operating state of the movable body 32.

In the variable display performance processing in step S172 of the performance control process processing, each time the performance control process timer value is updated, a determination is made as to whether it matches any of the performance control process timer judgment values, and if it does match, control of the performance operation is performed according to the various corresponding control data. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 proceeds with the control of the performance devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, light-emitting elements such as game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, vibration motor 131, movable body 32, etc.) according to the contents of process data #1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the performance control pattern. In addition, in each process data #1 to #n, the display control data #1 to #n, audio control data #1 to #n, lamp control data #1 to #n, operation detection control data #1 to #n, and vibration control data #1 to #n correspond to the performance control process timer judgment values #1 to #n, and constitute the performance control execution data #1 to #n that indicate the control content of the performance operation in the performance device and specify the execution of performance control.

The operation unit performance control pattern is composed of process data including, for example, a performance control process timer judgment value, lamp control data, and vibration control data. The lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light-emitting body in the operation unit performance, such as the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2. In other words, the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the light emission mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are illuminated in the light emission performance included in the operation unit performance. The vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern includes data that indicates the on period and drive mode of the vibration generating device in the operation unit performance, such as the drive of the vibration motor 131. In other words, the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern is data that specifies the vibration mode when the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31B are vibrated in the vibration performance included in the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-9 shows an example of the timing settings for the operation section performance in vibration performance execution example AKE01. Timings AKT01 to AKT03 are timings for which the operation section performance can be executed at the start of pre-change, corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the pre-change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, the operation section performance can be executed at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-change, depending on the remaining number of times. For example, if the remaining number of times is "3", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT01, if the remaining number of times is "2", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT02, and if the remaining number of times is "1", the operation section performance can be executed at timing AKT03.

Timing AKT11 shown in FIG. 12-9 corresponds to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern that is the target change, and is the timing at which the operation unit performance can be executed at the start of the target change. For example, if a continuous performance pattern is determined in step AKS105 of the advance notice setting process, at some or all of timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the advance change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times, and then at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance can be executed using the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the remaining number of times being "0". Also, at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change, the operation unit performance may be executed. Specifically, if one of the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit performance can be executed using the determined operation unit performance pattern at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target change.

The timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as timing AKT01 to AKT03 or timing AKT11, may be such that the operation unit performance can be executed at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the operation unit performance can be executed when a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. In this way, the timing corresponding to the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be any timing that can be reached by the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Timings AKT12 to AKT14 shown in Figure 12-9 are timings at which the operation unit presentation when a reach is established, when a reach develops, and when a hit/miss notification is triggered can be executed as operation unit presentations corresponding to the current variable display. For example, depending on the operation unit presentation pattern determined in step AKS202 of the variable display start setting process, there are cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established, cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach develops, and cases where the operation unit presentation can be executed at timing AKT14 when a hit/miss notification is triggered. Specifically, if either operation unit presentation pattern AKC21 or AKC22 is determined in step AKS202, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established. Also, if step AKS202 determines that either operation unit presentation pattern AKC31 or AKC32 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT13, which is the time when the reach develops. Alternatively, if step ASK202 determines that operation unit presentation pattern AKC41 is selected, the operation unit presentation according to the determined operation unit presentation pattern can be executed at timing AKT14, which is the time when the win/loss notification is triggered.

Figure 12-10 shows an example of control of the operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01. The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-10 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 shown in Figure 12-10 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV01 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated three times every 300 milliseconds, as shown in Figure 12-10 (B). The light emission performance associated with this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emitting white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-10 (A). During the off period of the vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In the light emission effect, the light color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration effect, and the white light emission luminance may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first luminance with a high white light emission luminance and a second luminance with a low white light emission luminance every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 300 milliseconds.

Figure 12-11 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by operation unit performance patterns AKC02 and AKC03. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC02 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The operation unit performance by operation unit performance pattern AKC03 includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-11 (A) and a vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 as shown in Figure 12-11 (B), and can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03 when the pre-variation starts. The vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 1500 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-11 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-11(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC02, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 continuously emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC03, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the multiple LEDs constituting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may emit light in rainbow colors by transitioning between red, red-purple, blue-purple, blue, green, yellow, and orange light colors according to the elapsed time and the light emission position. The light emission positions of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be specified as multiple sections, such as the top and bottom of the lever lamp 9B1 and the entire button lamp 9B2, and it is sufficient that the light emission time, light emission color, and light emission brightness may be partially or entirely set according to each section.

Figure 12-12 shows an example of control of the operation part performance by the operation part performance pattern AKC11. The operation part performance by the operation part performance pattern AKC11 includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color shown in Figure 12-12 (A) becomes white, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02 shown in Figure 12-12 (B), and can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02 is a vibration mode in which the on-period of 1500 milliseconds continues, as shown in Figure 12-12 (B). In the light-emitting performance associated with this vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration performance, as shown in Figure 12-12 (A). In the light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes white in accordance with the on-period of the vibration performance, the white light-emitting brightness may change periodically, for example, by alternating between a first brightness with a high white light-emitting brightness and a second brightness with a low light-emitting brightness every 30 milliseconds during the on-period of 1500 milliseconds.

Figure 12-13 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation patterns AKC12 and AKC13. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC12 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes red as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The operation unit presentation by operation unit presentation pattern AKC13 includes a light emission presentation in which the light color becomes rainbow as shown in Figure 12-13 (A) and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 as shown in Figure 12-13 (B), and can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. The vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV03 is a vibration mode in which the on period continues for 3000 milliseconds as shown in Figure 12-13 (B). As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is such that, in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC12, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 intermittently emit red light in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect, and in the case of the operation unit performance pattern AKC13, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit rainbow light. For example, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may periodically change the light emission brightness of red light by alternately repeating a first brightness with a high light emission brightness of red light and a second brightness with a low light emission brightness every 20 milliseconds during the on period of the vibration effect. In this case, the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 has a light emission mode that changes the light emission brightness in a shorter period than the light emission effect included in the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. In this way, the light emission performance may be performed in a different light emission period as well as a different light emission color, so that the reliability of a jackpot can be suggested. During the on period of the vibration effect, red light may be emitted intermittently, for example, by alternating between red light emission and non-emission every 20 milliseconds. As a presentation mode of the light-emitting effect, the light emission cycle may be common, but the light emission color may be different to indicate the reliability of a jackpot. In this way, for example, when the light-emitting colors in the light-emitting effects are different, the light-emitting cycle may be common to reduce the control burden of the light-emitting effects.

Figure 12-14 shows an example of control of the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC21 can be executed in response to the performance AKR1 shown in Figure 12-14 (A) which is the performance when the reach is established at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color shown in Figure 12-14 (B) becomes pink, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 shown in Figure 12-14 (C). The performance AKR1 which is the performance when the reach is established may be, for example, a performance that displays a performance image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a performance that displays a background image according to the reach establishment, or may be any other performance associated with the establishment of the reach. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV11 is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times every predetermined time (for example, 100 milliseconds) as shown in Figure 12-14 (C). As shown in FIG. 12-14(B), the light emission effect accompanying this vibration effect is achieved by the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 lighting up in pink in accordance with the ON period of the vibration effect. During the OFF period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off.

Figure 12-15 shows an example of control of the operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22. The operation unit presentation by the operation unit presentation pattern AKC22 can be executed in response to presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, shown in Figure 12-15 (A), at the timing AKT12 when a reach is established, and includes a light emission presentation in which the light color shown in Figure 12-15 (B) becomes orange, and a vibration presentation by vibration pattern AKV12 shown in Figure 12-15 (C). Presentation AKR2, which is the presentation when a reach is established, may be, for example, a presentation that displays a presentation image showing a reach line on the display screen of the image display device 5, or may be a presentation that displays a background image according to the establishment of a reach, or may be any other presentation associated with the establishment of a reach. Presentation AKR1 and presentation AKR2, which are the presentations when a reach is established, may have different presentation forms. As shown in FIG. 12-15(C), the vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV12 is a vibration mode including an on period of the first vibration on time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) and an off period of the first vibration off time (e.g., 100 milliseconds) alternately repeated twice, followed by an on period of the second vibration on time (e.g., 250 milliseconds) and an on period of the third vibration on time (e.g., 500 milliseconds). As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the light emission effect associated with this vibration effect is such that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect. During the off period of the vibration effect, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 do not emit light and are turned off. In addition, when the on period of the vibration effect is a different vibration on time, the light emission patterns of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may be different. For example, during the on period of the first vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit light in orange continuously. In contrast, during the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit orange light intermittently. During the on periods of the second vibration on time and the third vibration on time, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 alternate between emitting orange light and not emitting light every 20 milliseconds, thereby intermittently emitting orange light.

The operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32 can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops, corresponding to the performances AKS1 and AKS2 when the reach develops, and include a light emission performance in which the light color becomes white, and a vibration performance by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC31, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV21 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS1. In the case of operation unit performance pattern AKC32, the vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV22 becomes a vibration mode for the on period that matches the performance AKS2. In both cases of operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32, the light emission performance associated with these vibration performances is that the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 emit white light in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

The operation section performance by the operation section performance pattern AKC41 can be executed in response to the win/lose prompting performance at the timing AKT14 when the win/lose notification is prompted, and includes a light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold, and a vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31. The vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV31 is a vibration mode with an on period of 1500 milliseconds or more. The light emission performance accompanying this vibration performance is performed by the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 lighting up in gold in accordance with the on period of the vibration performance.

As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the light emission mode of the light emission effect accompanying the vibration effect includes the case where the light emission color becomes white and the case where the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color becomes white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03, which is different from vibration pattern AKV02, is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs when the light emission color becomes white and when the light emission color becomes red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that when the light emission color becomes red and when the light emission color becomes rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV03 is executed in both cases. In other words, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration pattern AKV02, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC11. The operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color becomes white in association with the vibration performance by the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance patterns AKC31 and AKC32. In this way, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops have a common light-emitting color of white, and the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting modes are common, while the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified to improve the interest in the game. In addition, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting performance in which the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, such as the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 or AKC13. As in this case, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts and the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops may have different light-emitting modes and different vibration modes. As in the case where the light-emitting color becomes white, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts includes a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is common to the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. Also, as in the case where the light-emitting color becomes red or rainbow, the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts may include a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance that is different from the operation unit performance executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops. The operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach develops does not have to include an illumination pattern of the illumination effect that is different from the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts.

The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. All of these operation unit effects have a jackpot reliability of 100%. The operation unit effects that can be executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered include operation unit effects by operation unit effect pattern AKC41, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes gold in association with the vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV31. This operation unit effect has a jackpot reliability of 100%. In this way, the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered have a common jackpot reliability of 100%, and there are cases in which the vibration modes of the vibration effects are different. In addition, the light emission color and vibration pattern of the vibration effect are different between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when the reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit effect is different, the reliability of the big hit is the same, but the vibration pattern of the vibration effect or the light emission pattern of the light emission effect is different, so that the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be increased.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC11 to AKC13, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white, red, or rainbow in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established, include operation unit effects based on operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects based on vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting patterns of the light-emitting patterns and the vibration patterns of the vibration effects differ between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT11, when the target fluctuation starts, and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12, when a reach is established. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation section performance differs, the light emission mode of the light emission performance differs, and the vibration mode of the vibration performance differs, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, thereby increasing the interest in playing the game.

Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC21 and AKC22, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes pink or orange in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12. Operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed include operation unit effects by operation unit effect patterns AKC31 and AKC32, which execute light-emitting effects in which the light color becomes white in association with vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22. In this way, there are cases where the light-emitting state of the light-emitting state differs between the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT12 when a reach is established and the operation unit effect executed at timing AKT13 when a reach is developed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect differs. In this way, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, the light emission state of the light emission performance or the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a white light emission color. Also, the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed may include a light emission performance that executes a light emission performance with a pink or orange light emission color. As a result, when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different, even if the light emission state of the light emission performance is the same, the vibration state of the vibration performance is different, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT01 to AKT03 when the preliminary fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT11 when the target fluctuation starts, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more, 70% or more, or 100% depending on the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT12 when the reach is established, the jackpot reliability is 100% regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT13 when the reach is developed, the jackpot reliability is 50% or more regardless of the operation unit performance pattern. When the operation unit performance is executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, the jackpot reliability is 100%. Therefore, the jackpot reliability when the operation unit performance is executed may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance and the timing when the vibration performance is executed. In addition, the vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect. Note that the vibration mode of the vibration effect can be varied by varying the vibration time according to the length of the on period, the vibration intensity caused by driving the vibration motor 131, the combination of the on period and the off period, the combination of strong and weak vibrations in vibration intensity, or any other vibration pattern that vibrates an operating member such as the operating lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B.

The multiple specific effects that can be executed according to the progress of the game include the moving body operation, image display, music playback, or the jackpot confirmation notification, and the jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The reach performance of SP Reach A has a jackpot reliability of about 40%, for example. Therefore, the vibration performance by the operation unit performance has a higher jackpot reliability than the reach performance of SP Reach A, and the proportion of the game being controlled to a jackpot game state when executed is higher. The moving body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A are all executed as part of the reach performance, so they do not have individual jackpot reliability. In addition, the jackpot confirmation notification is a performance that definitely notifies that the variable display result is a "jackpot". The jackpot type lottery CH1, CH2 are lottery performances of jackpot types according to the number of rounds, etc., corresponding to the case where the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. The jackpot confirmation notification and jackpot type selection CH1, CH2 differ from effects with a high jackpot reliability, such as the reach effect of SP Reach A, in that the player can undoubtedly recognize that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state. In this way, for a specific effect that has a high jackpot reliability among multiple specific effects, it is sufficient that the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the specific effect is executed. Also, the jackpot reliability is set to be higher when a vibration effect is executed by the operation unit performance than when the vibration effect is not executed by the operation unit performance.

Figure 12-16 shows an example of the performance of effects achieved by illuminating the game effect lamps 9. The game effect lamps 9 include an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, and a right frame lamp 9N, which are different from the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2. Here, multiple performance execution examples AKF01 to AKF04 are shown according to the mode of performance execution by illuminating the lights.

In performance execution example AKF01, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a white display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in red by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC02 or AKC12 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to red in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In the performance execution example AKF02, when the background display of the image display device 5 is a red display color, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in red to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in rainbow colors due to the illumination effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using either of the operation unit performance patterns AKC03 or AKC13 includes an illumination effect in which the illumination color becomes rainbow in conjunction with the vibration effect.

In performance execution example AKF03, when the background display of the image display device 5 changes from black to white display color from left to right, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated to change from black to white to match the background display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated white by a lighting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a lighting effect in which the light color changes to white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

In performance execution example AKF04, when the text display on the image display device 5 is blue, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N are illuminated in blue to match the text display, while the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in white by a light-emitting effect in the operation unit performance. For example, the operation unit performance using any of the operation unit performance patterns AKC01, AKC11, AKC31, and AKC32 includes a light-emitting effect in which the light color becomes white in conjunction with a vibration performance.

For example, a predetermined performance by displaying background display, text display, or any other performance image on the image display device 5 can be executed according to the progress of the game, including the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the performance processing during variable display executed in step S172 of the performance control process processing, the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting processing is used to control the execution of a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, such as the variable display. This control data includes display control data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, and lamp control data for controlling the emission of the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N. If an operation unit performance is executed during the execution of such a predetermined performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 can light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in the light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance in the operation unit performance. In the variable display performance process executed in step S172 of the performance control process, the control data read from the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203 of the variable display start setting process is used to control the execution of the operation unit performance. This control data includes lamp control data for controlling the emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2, and vibration control data for controlling the vibration of the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A by driving the vibration motor 131. In response to the emission performance associated with the vibration performance in such an operation unit performance, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N can emit light in a different light emission mode from the light emission performance of the operation unit performance associated with a predetermined performance. In this way, by making the emission modes different between the operation members such as the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A and other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N, the performance by light emission can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved.

The predetermined performance may be executed by the audio output of the speakers 8L and 8R in addition to or instead of the screen display of the image display device 5. In this case, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in a color that matches the audio output, such as background music, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in a color that matches the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. For example, when the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound that is a message that gives the player an impression of red, the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N may be illuminated in red that matches the audio output, while the operation lever and the push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be illuminated in white by the light-emitting performance in the operation unit performance. Even in this way, by making the light-emitting modes of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A different from those of the other light-emitting members such as the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, and the right frame lamp 9N different, the light-emitting effects can be appropriately diversified and the interest in the game can be improved. The predetermined effect may be to darken the screen display of the image display device 5, stop the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and make the upper frame lamp 9C, the left frame lamp 9M, the right frame lamp 9N, etc. non-illuminated (turned off). When this predetermined effect is executed, the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A may be vibrated by the vibration effect in the operation unit effect. By executing the operation unit effect during the execution of such a predetermined effect, the player's attention is further increased to the vibration effect that vibrates the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Figure 12-17 shows an example of the setting of the performance period in which a specific linked performance can be executed in the vibration performance execution example AKE02. The period AKZ01 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in association with the movable body movement in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ01 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes blue in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV41. The period AKZ02 is a period in which a specific linked performance including a special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42 can be executed in association with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. The specific linked performance that can be executed in the period AKZ02 includes a specific light-emitting performance in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A becomes gold in association with the special vibration performance by vibration pattern AKV42. The period AKZ03 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects using vibration pattern AKV43 can be executed in conjunction with the playback of music in the reach effect of SP Reach A. The specific linked effects that can be executed in period AKZ03 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operation lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B changes from blue to red to gold in conjunction with the special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV43.

The period AKZ04 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with the jackpot confirmation notification. The specific linked effects executable during period AKZ04 include a specific light emission effect in which the light emission color of the operating lever of stick controller 31A and push button 31B becomes rainbow-colored in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44. The jackpot confirmation notification may be any notification that allows the player to recognize a jackpot by stopping and displaying a confirmed decorative pattern that results in the display of a decorative pattern, displaying a performance image of a scene in which an ally character wins a battle with an enemy character in a reach presentation, outputting a jackpot confirmation notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R, turning on a jackpot confirmation notification lamp included in game effect lamp 9, or a combination of some or all of these.

In addition, following the operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC41 executed at the timing AKT14 when the hit/miss notification is triggered, a specific link performance may be executed during the period AKZ04 associated with the big win confirmation notification. In this case, the specific link performance associated with the big win confirmation notification is executed while the operation unit performance heightens the player's sense of expectation, thereby enhancing the impression of the performance and improving the interest in playing. When executing a specific link performance following such an operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance or the special vibration performance may be different between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance, or the light emission mode of the light emission performance or the specific light emission performance may be different. For example, the vibration intensity may be different between the vibration performance and the special vibration performance. The light emission brightness may be different between the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance. By making the vibration mode and light emission mode different to give the performance a sharp contrast, the difference between the operation unit performance and the specific link performance can be easily recognized, the performance can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in playing can be improved.

The period AKZ05 is a period during which specific linked effects including special vibration effects by vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed in conjunction with jackpot type lottery CH1 and CH2. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes white in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH1 is executed. Specific linked effects that can be executed during the period AKZ05 include a specific light emission effect in which the light color of the operating lever and push button 31B of stick controller 31A becomes rainbow in conjunction with the special vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV44 when jackpot type lottery CH2 is executed.

Figures 12-18 to 12-20 show cases where the reach performance of SP Reach A is executed. Figure 12-18 shows performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03 when a movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-19 shows performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13 when an image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A. Figure 12-20 shows performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23 when a music is played in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

When the variable display of the decorative pattern is in the reach mode and the reach performance of the normal reach is being executed, the position of the movable body 32 is not changed from the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 32 may be a position at the lower front end with respect to the display screen of the image display device 5. Next, when the reach performance of the SP reach A is started by the reach development, the position of the movable body 32 is changed from the initial position, as in the performance execution example AKG01, and the movable body operation is performed. At this time, the position of the movable body 32 is changed by linear movement or parallel movement upward from the initial position, and a performance image showing a message such as "SP reach A" is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part provided inside the movable body 32. After that, as the position change of the movable body 32 continues, the position of the movable body 32 passes near the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, as in the performance execution example AKG02. At this time, a performance image showing a message such as "This change is ..." is displayed at the display position of the image display device 5 corresponding to the window part of the movable body 32.

As the position of the movable body 32 is changed, as in the performance execution examples AKG01 and AKG02, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed along with the movable body operation in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using the vibration pattern AKV41 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes blue during the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17. Furthermore, when the position of the movable body 32 continues to be changed and the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen of the image display device 5 as in the performance execution example AKG03, the specific interlocking performance during the period AKZ01 ends. For example, the period AKZ01 corresponding to the time when the position of the movable body 32 reaches the front upper end of the display screen, which is the initial position, is 2500 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a special vibration effect may be executed in a vibration mode that switches between an on period in which the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrates every 250 milliseconds and an off period in which no vibration occurs. Also, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that continuously lights up the operating lever or push button 31B of the stick controller 31A in blue over the period AKZ01. Alternatively, during the period AKZ01, a specific light-emitting effect may be executed in a light-emitting mode that switches between blue light (on) and no light (off) every 250 milliseconds.

When the movable body operation is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG01 to AKG03, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a light pattern in which the light color and light brightness gradually change from bottom to top as the position of the movable body 32 is changed. For example, when the position of the movable body 32 is changed, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light in a blue light color and with a light brightness that changes in a wave shape depending on the height and time.

After the movable body operation is completed as in performance execution example AKG03, a performance image is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 as in performance execution example AKG11, as an image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A. At this time, for example, text display showing the message "Super Hot" is displayed in a gold display color. Also, as in performance execution example AKG12, an effect image can be added around the text display.

In conjunction with the display of the performance image, which is an image display such as the performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, a specific interlocking performance is executed, causing the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A to emit light along with vibration. The specific interlocking performance executed in conjunction with the image display in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV42 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color becomes gold during the period AKZ02 shown in FIG. 12-17. When the display of the text indicating the message ends and the display of the performance image in the reach performance different from the text display begins, as in the performance execution example AKG13, the specific interlocking performance in the period AKZ02 ends. For example, the period AKZ02 corresponding to the text display indicating the message "Super Hot" is 1000 milliseconds, and the special vibration performance may be executed in a vibration mode that is an on period in which the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A vibrate continuously over this period AKZ02. Also, during period AKZ02, a specific light-emitting effect may be performed with the operation lever of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B alternately repeating a first luminance with a high gold light emission brightness and a second luminance with a low light emission brightness every 10 milliseconds.

When image display is executed in the reach performance of SP Reach A such as performance execution examples AKG11 to AKG13, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, for example, to match the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 and the emission color of the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. For example, with the display of a performance image resulting in an image display such as performance execution examples AKG11 and AKG12, the upper frame lamp 9C, left frame lamp 9M, and right frame lamp 9N may emit light of gold, and when the display of a performance image such as performance execution example AKG13 begins, they may emit light of a color different from gold.

After the display of a performance image as in performance execution example AKG13 has begun, the sound of music phrase PH01 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A as in performance execution example AKG21. Next, the sound of music phrase PH02 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG22. After that, the sound of music phrase PH03 is output from speakers 8L and 8R as in performance execution example AKG23. In this way, by outputting the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 in sequence as the performance progresses, it is possible to execute the overall music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A.

In conjunction with the output of sound that results in music playback as in performance execution examples AKG21 to AKG23, a specific linked performance is executed, causing the operation lever of the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B to vibrate and emit light. The specific linked performance executed in conjunction with music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A includes a special vibration performance using vibration pattern AKV43 and a specific light emission performance in which the light color changes from blue to red and then from red to gold during the period AKZ03 shown in FIG. 12-17. In performance execution example AKG21, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes blue in response to the sound output of music phrase PH01. In performance execution example AKG22, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes red in response to the sound output of music phrase PH02. In performance execution example AKG23, a specific light emission performance is executed in which the light color becomes gold in response to the sound output of music phrase PH03. In this way, it is possible to execute a specific light-emitting effect in which the light color changes to multiple colors as the sounds of multiple music phrases PH01 to PH03 are output in sequence as the performance progresses.

Figure 12-21 shows a music playback execution example AKH01 in which the scales change in sequence as the performance progresses. In this case, for example, as shown in Figure 12-21 (A), during a period AKZ03 in which a specific linked performance can be executed in conjunction with music playback, sounds corresponding to the scales of Do, Re, Mi, Fa, So, La, Si, and Do are output by speakers 8L and 8R. Here, the scale of Do output last needs to be one octave higher than the scale of Do output first.

Such a specific linked performance associated with music playback includes a light-emitting performance in which the light color changes as shown in FIG. 12-21(B) and a vibration performance in which the special vibration performance is based on the vibration pattern shown in FIG. 12-21(C), and can be executed during a period AKZ03 corresponding to music playback. The vibration performance shown in FIG. 12-21(C) is a vibration mode in which an on period and an off period are alternately repeated multiple times in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale. In the specific light-emitting performance associated with this special vibration performance, the light-emitting color of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 changes in sequence between blue, red, and gold in accordance with the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale and the on period of the special vibration performance, as shown in FIG. 12-21(B). During the stop period of the sound output and the off period of the special vibration performance, the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 may not emit light and may be turned off. Note that during the output period of the sound corresponding to each scale, the light-emitting mode of the specific light-emitting performance may be different for each scale. For example, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are continuously illuminated in blue over a period corresponding to the scale of C that is first output. Next, during a period corresponding to the scale of D, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between a first luminance with a high red illumination luminance and a second luminance with a low red illumination luminance. After that, during a period corresponding to the scale of E, the operating lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A are illuminated in an illumination mode that alternates between gold illumination (lit) and non-illumination (unlit). In this way, by providing illumination modes with different amounts of illumination for each illumination color corresponding to each scale, the presentation can be appropriately diversified and interest in the game can be increased.

The reach performance of SP Reach A is controlled to be executable by using the control data read from the variable display performance control pattern in response to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command. The variable display performance control pattern shown in FIG. 12-8 (A) is set to be able to execute a specific linked performance in association with a specific performance such as the movable body operation, image display, and music playback in the reach performance of SP Reach A by the lamp control data and vibration control data. In the specific linked performance, a special vibration performance can be executed by any of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The vibration mode is different between the special vibration performance by any of these vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44 and the vibration performance by the vibration pattern in the operation unit performance. In this way, the vibration mode is different between the vibration performance in the operation unit performance that can be executed regardless of the specific performance and the special vibration performance in the specific linked performance that can be executed in association with the execution of the specific performance, so that the performance using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B can be appropriately diversified, and the interest in the game can be improved.

When an operation section performance is executed, a vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is accompanied by a light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. When a specific linked performance is executed, a specific light emission performance that uses the lever lamp 9B1 and button lamp 9B2 to light up the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A is executed in conjunction with a special vibration performance that vibrates the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A. By executing a performance that includes vibration and light emission of the operation members such as the operation lever and push button 31B of the stick controller 31A, for example, a player who has been paying attention to the image display on the display screen of the image display device 5 will recognize the vibration and light emission of the operation members that are different from the image display, and the unexpectedness of the performance will be enhanced.

During the period AKZ01 shown in FIG. 12-17, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV41 can be executed in conjunction with the movement of movable body 32, which is the movable object movement in the reach effect of SP Reach A. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect during the movement period of movable body 32, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

During the period AKZ04 shown in FIG. 12-17, in response to a confirmed jackpot notification, a specific linked effect including a special vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV44 can be executed. In this way, by being able to execute a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operating members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

The specific linkage effects include specific light emission effects in which the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 light up in association with a special vibration effect produced by one of the vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44. The light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the operation unit effects and the specific light emission effects accompanying the special vibration effects in the specific linkage effects differ in terms of light emission patterns, such as light color. In this way, by making the light emission patterns different depending on the operation unit effects and the specific linkage effects, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase interest in the game.

As shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. As shown in Figures 12-12 and 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white, and when the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV03 is executed. Therefore, the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, and the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are executed at different times and have different vibration patterns. In addition, the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01, which is the start of the pre-variation, and the light emission color of the vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, are white, red, or rainbow, so that the light emission patterns of the light emission patterns are the same. In this way, by providing cases where the vibration patterns of the vibration effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different, while the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are the same, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effects of the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-variation, are executed in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the operation unit effects are executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target variation, based on the winning time judgment result, which is the pre-reading judgment result. In this way, by varying the timing at which the operation unit effects are executed, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and push button 31B, thereby increasing interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 12-10 and FIG. 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03 that are the start of the pre-variation, the light emission modes of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow, which are different from white. When the light emission color is white, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV01 is executed, and when the light emission color is red or rainbow, a vibration effect using vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs between when the light emission color is white and when the light emission color is red or rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effects is common, the vibration mode of the vibration effect differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, thereby appropriately diversifying the effects using the operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, and increasing the interest in the game. Note that when the light emission color is red and when the light emission color is rainbow, a vibration effect using the common vibration pattern AKV02 is executed. Therefore, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same when the light color is red and when the light color is rainbow. In this way, when the timing for executing the operation unit effect is the same, it is possible to provide a case where the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the light emission mode of the light emission effect.

The continuous performance patterns used to execute the continuous preview performance include operation unit performance patterns in which the light emission color in the light emission performance differs depending on whether the remaining number is other than "0" or "0". For example, the continuous performance pattern AKD02 shown in FIG. 12-5 (A) includes an operation unit performance pattern AKC01 when the remaining number is "1" and an operation unit performance pattern AKC12 when the remaining number is "0". The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC01 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes white. The operation unit performance by the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 includes a light emission performance in which the light emission color becomes red. Therefore, the light emission mode is different between the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, and the light emission performance associated with the vibration performance of the operation unit performance that can be executed at the timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation. In this way, by providing different lighting conditions for the lighting effects when the timing for executing the operation section effects differs, it is possible to appropriately diversify the effects using operation members such as the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B, thereby increasing the interest in playing the game.

In the continuous performance pattern used to execute the continuous notice performance, the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is small is set to prevent the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large from being lower than the jackpot reliability of the operation unit performance pattern corresponding to the case where the remaining number of times is large. For example, in the continuous performance pattern shown in FIG. 12-5 (A), if the operation unit performance pattern AKC02 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". If the operation unit performance pattern AKC03 is set when the remaining number of times is "1", it is set to prevent the operation unit performance pattern AKC11 or the operation unit performance pattern AKC12 from becoming the operation unit performance pattern when the remaining number of times is "0". This prevents the operation unit performance with a low jackpot reliability from being executed later at the start of the target fluctuation, etc., even though the operation unit performance with a high jackpot reliability was executed first at the start of the pre-variation, so that the player's expectations are not lowered and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-10 and 12-11, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the pre-fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white, and when the light emission color is white, light emission and non-emission are repeated in accordance with the on and off periods of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV01, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted continuously in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02. As shown in FIG. 12-12 and FIG. 12-13, among the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects include cases where the light emission color is white and cases where the light emission color is red or rainbow colors different from white. When the light emission color is white, light is emitted in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV02, and when the light emission color is red, light is emitted intermittently in accordance with the on period of the vibration effect by vibration pattern AKV03. Since the on period settings are different for the vibration effects by vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03, the light emission patterns, such as the light emission period of the light emission effects, are different. Even in this way, it is sufficient to provide cases where the light emission patterns of the light emission effects are different when the timing of executing the operation unit effects is different.

(Modifications of characteristic portions 48AK to 50AK)
Regarding the operation unit performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Regarding the specific linked performance, the timing of execution, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The timing of execution of the operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. The timing of execution of the specific linked performance, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the timing of execution of the operation unit performance, the vibration mode of the vibration performance, the light emission mode of the light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree. The timing of execution of the specific linked performance, the vibration mode of the special vibration performance, the light emission mode of the specific light emission performance, and the jackpot reliability may be varied according to any advantageous degree related to the game in the pachinko game machine 1, or may be determined at different rates according to such advantageous degree.

The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of executing the operation unit performance is different and when it is common, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance is different and when it is common, when the jackpot reliability is different and when it is common, etc., can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. The combinations of each case, such as when the timing of execution is different and when it is common between the operation unit performance and the specific linked performance, when the vibration mode of the vibration performance and the special vibration performance is different and when it is common, when the light emission mode of the light emission performance and the specific light emission performance is different and when it is common, can be set arbitrarily according to the specifications of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, when the vibration modes of the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the light emission performance by making the light emission mode of the light emission performance common. When the light emission modes of the light emission performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making the vibration mode of the vibration performance common. When some vibration modes in the vibration performance are different, it is sufficient to reduce the control burden of the vibration performance by making other vibration modes in the vibration performance common. For example, if the vibration intensities in the vibration effects are different, the control burden of the vibration effects can be reduced by standardizing the vibration cycles in the vibration effects. If some of the light emission patterns in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing other light emission patterns in the light emission effects. For example, if the light emission colors in the light emission effects are different, the control burden of the light emission effects can be reduced by standardizing the light emission cycles in the light emission effects. The control burden can also be reduced by similar standardization for the vibration patterns of special vibration effects and the light emission patterns of specific light emission effects.

In addition to or instead of during execution of the variable display, when the game is controlled to any game state such as a small win game state or a big win game state, the operation unit performance or the specific linked performance may be executable. For example, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of the V winning attacker opening, the opening time, the number of openings, or the number of rounds of the big win game state controlled after the occurrence of the V winning. When the game is controlled to a big win game state, the operation unit performance may be executed at a predetermined ratio depending on the presence or absence of time-saving control or probability change control after the end of the big win game state, the end condition, the presence or absence of rank-up, which is an increase in the number of rounds from the number of rounds previously notified in the big win game state, and the increase amount. Specific linked performance may be executed in conjunction with specific performances such as moving objects, image display, and music playback in the small win game state or the big win game state.

The specific effect capable of executing a specific linked effect may be any effect that can be executed in response to the execution of the variable display, or any effect that can be executed regardless of the execution of the variable display. For example, unlike a reach effect, when a suggestive effect is executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" at a certain rate and that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state, the specific linked effect may be executable during some or all of the effect period.

When controlled to any presentation state, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations. For example, when controlled to a presentation state that is a special presentation mode, it may be possible to execute operation unit presentations and specific linked presentations at a higher rate than when controlled to a presentation state that is a presentation mode other than the special presentation mode.

The operating member capable of executing effects by vibration or light emission may be any motion detection member configured to detect the motion of the player. For example, it may be a sensor that detects the operation of a jog dial that can be rotated, or it may be a sensor that detects the touch operation or pressing operation on a touch panel. In addition, a sensor that can detect a predetermined motion by the player, such as an infrared sensor, ultrasonic sensor, CCD sensor, or CMOS sensor, may be used. The motion of the player may be detected by analyzing the results of photographing the player's hands, etc. using a predetermined camera (video motion capture). In addition, any configuration that can detect the predetermined motion of the player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically may be used. In addition to such a motion detection member, a contact member that the player can contact with his/her hand, etc. may be provided, and the contact member may be vibrated or illuminated together with the motion detection member or separately from the motion detection member.

The vibration effects included in the operation unit effects may correspond to the vibration effects in the characteristic part 48AK, the predetermined vibration effects in the characteristic part 49AK, and the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects executable at timings AKT01 to AKT03, which are the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects, the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects executable at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The light emission effects included in the operation unit effects may correspond to the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects in the characteristic part 48AK, the light emission effects accompanying the predetermined vibration effects in the characteristic part 49AK, and the light emission effects accompanying the first and second vibration effects in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT01 to AKT03, which is the start of the preliminary fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the first vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. Of the light-emitting effects included in the operation unit effects, the light-emitting effects accompanying the vibration effects included in the operation unit effects that can be executed at timing AKT11, which is the start of the target fluctuation, may correspond to the light-emitting effects accompanying the second vibration effect in the characteristic part 50AK. The special vibration effect included in the specific linked effect may correspond to the special vibration effect in the characteristic part 49AK.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

These time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state. However, if a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery will be held to determine whether or not to switch to the time-saving state, and no lottery will be held to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when the time-saving symbol is selected using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in conjunction with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) will not change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for a time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability, low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of times that are predetermined depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 48AK)
The gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a vibration effect in which the operating means vibrates, and a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect in which the operating means emits light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed, and the vibration state of the vibration effect is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit effect pattern. The fact that the rate of control to the advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting effect and the timing at which the vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern and the use of the operation unit effect pattern. The vibration mode of the vibration effect may differ depending on the light emission mode of the light emission effect, for example, in the light colors and vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 included in the operation unit effect patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be common between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be common, for example, when the light emission color is white. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11, AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach mode, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, which is different from pink or orange. The different vibration mode may be, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 are different from the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing a vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute a visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute a visual guidance effect before the vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 49AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player includes an operating means operable by a player, a vibration effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect as vibration effects in which the operating means vibrates, a light-emitting effect execution means capable of executing a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect, and a specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect in accordance with the progress of a game, and the proportion of the game being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the game being controlled to an advantageous state differs depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect, and the vibration state differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot game state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko game machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The predetermined vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern. The special vibration effect may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The vibration effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the operation unit effect control pattern or the vibration control data of the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light-emitting effect may be, for example, the light-emitting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light-emitting color included in the operation unit effect pattern. The light-emitting effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The specific effect may be, for example, the reach effect of SP reach A, the big win confirmation notification, the big win type lottery, etc. The specific effect execution means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the variable display effect processing of step S172 based on the variable display effect control pattern determined in step AKS203. The higher the rate of control to an advantageous state when a predetermined vibration effect is executed, the higher the probability of control to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to an operation unit performance pattern. The different rate of control to an advantageous state according to the light emission mode of the light emission effect and the timing at which a predetermined vibration effect is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the application of the operation unit performance pattern. The ability to execute a special vibration effect may be, for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05. The different vibration modes between a predetermined vibration effect and a special vibration effect may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 that are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, timings AKT01 to AKT03, AKT11, etc.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached a reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the predetermined vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV02 different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the light emission mode may be common when the light emission color is white, for example. The vibration mode may be different when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22, for example.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration mode may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV11, AKV12 is different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the predetermined vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the predetermined vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the different vibration mode may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV11, AKV12, etc., different from the vibration patterns AKV21, AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game device includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a predetermined vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting performance associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a character image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode corresponding to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode corresponding to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode corresponding to the lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing a predetermined vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing subsequent to the first timing, and is capable of executing the predetermined vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the predetermined vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. at step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. at step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The execution of the predetermined vibration effect may have a higher rate of being controlled to an advantageous state than the execution of the specific effect. Here, the rate of being controlled to an advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot expectation rate of 50% or more, which is higher than the execution of the reach effect of SP Reach A.
In such a configuration, the player's anticipation for the specified vibration effects can be heightened, improving his/her interest in the game.

The specific effect execution means may execute an effect of moving a movable member as the specific effect, and the vibration effect execution means may execute a special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member. Here, the effect of moving the movable member may be, for example, the effect execution examples AKG01 to AKG03. The special vibration effect during the operation of the movable member may be, for example, a vibration effect using a vibration pattern AKV41.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing a special vibration effect in response to a notification that the control is in an advantageous state. Here, the notification that the control is in an advantageous state may be, for example, a notification of a confirmed jackpot, etc. The special vibration effect in response to this notification may be, for example, a vibration effect by the vibration pattern AKV44, etc.
In such a configuration, the vibration effects can be diversified to increase the interest in the game.

The light emission effect execution means can execute a specific light emission effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with a special vibration effect, and the light emission form may be different between the light emission effect associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the specific light emission effect associated with the special vibration effect. Here, the specific light emission effect may be, for example, the light emission of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the lamp control data included in the variable display effect control pattern. The light emission form may be different, for example, when the light emission color is white, red, or rainbow, different from when the light emission color changes from blue or gold, or from blue to red and then to gold.
According to such a configuration, the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A limiting means for limiting the execution of a predetermined vibration effect when the special vibration effect is executed may be provided. Here, the limiting means may be, for example, the effect control CPU 120 when the operation unit effect is determined in step AKS202.
According to this configuration, the vibration effects can be appropriately executed to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Means for solving the problem and effects of characteristic part 50AK)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player includes an operating means that can be operated by a player, a vibration effect execution means that can execute a first vibration effect and a second vibration effect as vibration effects that vibrate the operating means, and a light-emitting effect execution means that can execute a light-emitting effect that causes the operating means to emit light in association with the vibration effect, and the proportion of the advantageous state is higher when the vibration effect is executed than when the vibration effect is not executed, and the proportion of the advantageous state is different depending on the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect associated with the vibration effect, and the timing of execution of the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are different, and the light-emitting state of the light-emitting effect is common to the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Here, the advantageous state may be, for example, a jackpot gaming state. The gaming machine may be, for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1. The operating means may be, for example, a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like. The first vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the vibration motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV01 and AKV02 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03. The second vibration performance may be, for example, the driving of the drive motor 131 by the vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03 included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC11 to AKC13. The vibration performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The light emission performance may be, for example, the lighting of the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light emission performance execution means may be, for example, the performance control CPU 120 that executes the variable display performance process of step S172 using the lamp control data of the operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the vibration performance is executed may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is different according to the light emission state of the light emission performance accompanying the vibration performance may be, for example, a jackpot reliability according to the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The fact that the timing of execution is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a pre-variation start timing AKT01 to AKT03 that is different from the target variation start timing AKT11. The fact that the vibration mode is different between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a vibration pattern AKV01 that is different from the vibration pattern AKV03. The fact that the light emission mode of the light emission performance is common between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance may be, for example, a case where the light emission color included in the operation unit performance patterns AKC01 to AKC03 and AKC11 to AKC13 is white, red, or rainbow.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display starts. Here, the timing when the variable display starts may be, for example, the timing AKT11 when the target variation starts.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the timing when the variable display becomes a reach state may be, for example, timing AKT12.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when the developing effect is executed after the variable display has reached the reach state. Here, the timing when the developing effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT13.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The vibration effect execution means may execute the second vibration effect at a timing when a notification effect is executed to notify whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state. Here, the timing when the notification effect is executed may be, for example, timing AKT14.
In such a configuration, the timing at which vibration effects can be executed can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The light emission mode of the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect that can be executed at the timing when the variable display is started includes a first light emission mode and a second light emission mode different from the first light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the second vibration effect may be different when the light emission effect is executed in the first light emission mode and when the light emission effect is executed in the second light emission mode. Here, the first light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The vibration mode may be different, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration pattern AKV03.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state may have a common light emission mode and different vibration modes. Here, the common light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV02 is different from the vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the notification effect is executed have the same ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state when executed, and the vibration modes may be different. Here, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state may be common, for example, when the jackpot reliability is 100%. The vibration modes may be different, for example, when the vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 are different from the vibration pattern AKV31.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The second vibration effect executed when the variable display starts and the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state may have different light emission modes and vibration modes. Here, the different light emission modes may be, for example, white, red, or rainbow colors, which are different from pink or orange. The different vibration modes may be, for example, vibration patterns AKV02 and AKV03, which are different from vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified according to timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The vibration mode may be different between the second vibration effect executed when the variable display becomes a reach state and the second vibration effect executed when the development effect is executed after the variable display becomes a reach state. Here, the vibration mode may be different, for example, in the case of vibration patterns AKV11 and AKV12 that are different from vibration patterns AKV21 and AKV22.
In such a configuration, the vibration modes of the vibration effects can be diversified according to the timing, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The game includes a first light-emitting means for illuminating the operation means, a second light-emitting means different from the first light-emitting means, and a predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance according to the progress of the game, and when a second vibration performance is executed during the execution of the predetermined performance, the first light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode of the light-emitting performance associated with the second vibration performance, and the second light-emitting means can emit light in a light-emitting mode different from the light-emitting mode associated with the predetermined performance. Here, the first light-emitting means may be, for example, a lever lamp 9B1, a button lamp 9B2, etc. The second light-emitting means may be, for example, an upper frame lamp 9C, a left frame lamp 9M, a right frame lamp 9N, etc. The predetermined performance may be, for example, a display of a background image or a text image. The predetermined performance execution means may be, for example, an image display device 5, etc. The light-emitting mode according to the vibration performance may be, for example, a light-emitting color included in the operation unit performance pattern. The light-emitting mode according to the predetermined performance may be, for example, a light-emitting mode according to lamp control data included in the variable display performance control pattern.
In such a configuration, the light emission modes of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be diversified, thereby improving interest in the game.

The game device includes a visual guidance effect execution means capable of executing a visual guidance effect that guides the player's visual line to the operation means, and the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the second vibration effect at a first timing and a second timing after the first timing, and is capable of executing the second vibration effect in a common vibration mode regardless of whether the timing is the first timing or the second timing, and the visual guidance effect execution means may not execute the visual guidance effect at the first timing, and may execute the visual guidance effect before the second vibration effect is executed at the second timing. Here, the visual guidance effect execution means may be, for example, game effect lamps 9L, 9R, etc. The first timing may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. The second timing may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. The common vibration mode may be, for example, a vibration time of 1.5 seconds or 3 seconds, etc. When the visual guidance effect is not executed at the first timing, it may be, for example, timings T1, T2, etc. in step 10SHS3. When the visual guidance effect can be executed at the second timing, it may be, for example, timings T3, T4, etc. in step 10SHS3.
In such a configuration, the vibration of the operating means can be appropriately recognized, and the excitement of the vibration effect can be sufficiently increased.

The vibration effect execution means may be capable of executing the first vibration effect in a variable display prior to the variable display in which the second vibration effect is executed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination. Here, the variable display prior to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory may be, for example, a variable display that is a pre-variable.

The light emission mode of the light emission performance associated with the first vibration performance includes a first vibration light emission mode and a second vibration light emission mode different from the first vibration light emission mode, and the vibration mode of the first vibration performance may be different when the light emission performance is performed in the first vibration light emission mode and when the light emission performance is performed in the second vibration light emission mode. Here, the first vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is white. The second vibration light emission mode may be, for example, when the light emission color is red or rainbow. The different vibration modes may be, for example, when the vibration pattern AKV01 is different from the vibration pattern AKV02.
In such a configuration, the vibration patterns of the vibration effects and the light emission patterns of the light emission effects can be diversified, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The light emission mode may be different between the light emission effect associated with the first vibration effect and the light emission effect associated with the second vibration effect. Here, the light emission mode may be different, for example, when the remaining number of times is other than "0" according to the continuous performance pattern, the light emission color of the operation unit performance pattern is different from that when the remaining number of times is "0".
In such a configuration, the light emission patterns of the light emission effects accompanying the vibration effects can be diversified, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(Explanation regarding association of characteristic parts 48AK to 50AK)
Each of the features 48AK to 50AK may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate. The combined features or individual features that are not combined may be combined with some or all of the features of the other features, as appropriate.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player, and can also be controlled to a normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state)) that is easier to control to the favorable state than the normal state, and that has operation means (e.g., a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, etc.) that can be operated by a player, and vibration effects that vibrate the operation means include a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving a vibration motor 131 by a vibration pattern included in an operation unit effect pattern) and a special vibration effect (e.g., a variable table a vibration effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 for performing a performance process during variable display in step S172 using the vibration control data of the operation unit performance control pattern or the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of performing a predetermined vibration effect (e.g., driving the vibration motor 131 by vibration control data included in the display effect control pattern, etc.); and a light emission effect execution means (e.g., an operation unit performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of performing a light emission effect (e.g., lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by a light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) that causes the operation unit to emit light in association with the predetermined vibration effect (e.g., lighting the lever lamp 9B1 and the button lamp 9B2 by a light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern, etc.). and a specific effect execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120 which executes the variable display performance process of step S172 based on the variable display performance control pattern determined in step AKS203) capable of executing specific effects (e.g., a reach effect of SP Reach A, a big win confirmation notification, a big win type lottery, etc.) in accordance with the progress of the game, and the rate at which the predetermined vibration effect is controlled to the advantageous state is higher (e.g., depending on the operation unit performance pattern, etc.) when the predetermined vibration effect is executed than when the predetermined vibration effect is not executed. the ratio controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the light emission mode of the light emission mode associated with the predetermined vibration effect and the timing at which the predetermined vibration effect is executed (for example, the light emission color included in the operation unit performance pattern and the jackpot reliability according to the use of the operation unit performance pattern), the vibration effect execution means is capable of executing the special vibration effect in association with the execution of the specific effect (for example, execution of a vibration effect in periods AKZ01 to AKZ05), and the vibration mode differs between the predetermined vibration effect and the special vibration effect (for example, vibration patterns AKV01 to AKV03 which are different from vibration patterns AKV41 to AKV44),
moreover,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of controlling presentation based on control information (e.g., a presentation control command shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
updating means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13) capable of updating a predetermined numerical data from a first value (e.g., "0") to a second value (e.g., "1" or "2") when the number of times that the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (e.g., a period during which consecutive wins have occurred) during which the normal state has never been controlled since the normal state was controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number (e.g., when the number of consecutive wins is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5");
an adjustment means for adjusting the speed at which the game value is awarded in a unit period to be decreased when the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-13 and 14-21, a portion for lengthening the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during a jackpot game by the CPU 103 setting the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the performance control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, after the CPU 103 executes the sending setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162SGS17, the part that executes the command control processing shown in FIG. 5);
The presentation control means is capable of executing presentation control based on control information capable of identifying that the specified numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in Figures 14-27 and 14-28, the presentation control CPU 120 is a part that, in a preview presentation determination process, identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and determines whether or not to execute a preview presentation during variable display and the presentation type of the preview presentation to be executed using a preview presentation type determination table corresponding to the identified ball output state), and a gaming machine can be mentioned.
According to such a configuration, interest in the game can be increased by drawing attention to the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the execution timing of the vibration effect. Furthermore, according to this feature, when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, an adjustment is executed to slow down the speed at which the game value is awarded, so that it is possible to prevent excessive game value from being awarded in a short period of time when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, which would lead to an excessive increase in gambling tendency, and it is possible to execute performance control corresponding to whether the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, thereby increasing interest in the game.
In other words, by using the operating means, it is possible to focus attention on the vibration mode of the vibration effect, the light emission mode of the light emission effect, and the timing of execution of the vibration effect, thereby increasing interest in the game, and since an adjustment is made to slow down the speed at which game value is awarded, it is possible to prevent excessive game value from being awarded in a short period of time, which would lead to excessively high gambling tendencies, and since it is possible to execute presentation control corresponding to whether or not the specified numerical data is the second value, a gaming machine that can increase interest in the game can be provided.

In other words, it is possible to draw attention to the light emission mode that has a high probability of controlling a specific vibration effect to an advantageous state, whether it is executed at the execution timing of a vibration effect, and whether a special vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a specific effect, thereby increasing interest in the game, and at the same time, when an adjustment is made to slow down the speed at which game value is awarded (for example, an adjustment is made to make the variable display time longer than when the speed at which game value is awarded is not slowed in the variation pattern selection), an effect corresponding to the adjustment is executed, so it is possible to prevent excessive game value from being awarded in a short period of time while preventing a decline in interest in the game. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is suitable for gambling and easily attracts the interest of players when installed in an amusement facility.

The vibration operation modes of the operating means may also be increased as the number of consecutive wins increases. In this way, the vibration modes of the operating means are diversified as the number of consecutive wins increases, increasing interest.

In addition, the operating means may vibrate when a certain number of wins (11 or more wins in 10 counts) occur in the variable winning means during an advantageous state. This allows the player to be easily notified that an over-win has occurred, increasing the player's interest.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine capable of increasing interest, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player, and can also be controlled to a normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state)) that is easier to control to the advantageous state than the normal state,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of controlling presentation based on control information (e.g., a presentation control command shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
updating means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13) capable of updating a predetermined numerical data from a first value (e.g., "0") to a second value (e.g., "1" or "2") when the number of times that the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (e.g., a period during which consecutive wins have occurred) during which the normal state has never been controlled since the normal state was controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state has reached a specific number (e.g., when the number of consecutive wins is equal to or greater than the first determination number of "5");
an adjustment means for adjusting the speed at which the game value is awarded in a unit period to be decreased when the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-13 and 14-21, a portion for lengthening the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during a jackpot game by the CPU 103 setting the ball output state flag value to "1" or "2" in the ball output state determination process);
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the performance control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, after the CPU 103 executes the sending setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162SGS17, the part that executes the command control processing shown in FIG. 5);
The presentation control means is capable of executing presentation control based on control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in Figs. 14-27 and 14-28, the presentation control CPU 120 is a part that, in the preview presentation determination process, identifies the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command, and determines whether or not to execute a preview presentation during variable display and the presentation type of the preview presentation to be executed using a preview presentation type determination table corresponding to the identified ball output state), and examples of the form of this gaming machine are described below as other examples.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[form]
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player, and can also be controlled to a normal state and a special state (e.g., a time-saving state (high probability high base state or low probability high base state)) that is easier to control to the favorable state than the normal state,
update means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13) capable of updating a predetermined numerical data from a first value (e.g., "0") to a second value (e.g., "1" or "2") when the number of times that the advantageous state has occurred during an advantageous period (e.g., a period during which consecutive wins have occurred) during which the normal state has never been controlled since the state was controlled to either the advantageous state or the special state has been controlled to the normal state has reached a specific number (e.g., when the number of consecutive wins is equal to or greater than "5", which is a first determination number); and adjustment means (e.g., a portion in which the CPU 103 executes the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13 and FIG. 14-21) for adjusting the granting speed of the game value granted in a unit period so as to decrease when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, thereby lengthening the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during a jackpot game;
The update means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value when the termination condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, when the CPU 103 sets the ball-out state flag to "1", the ball-out state flag is set to "0" based on the fact that the number of remaining variable display times after the determination, which was also set, becomes 0).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, an adjustment is made to slow down the rate at which game value is awarded when the specified numerical data is the second value, thereby preventing excessive game value from being awarded in a short period of time when the specified numerical data is the second value, which would lead to excessively high gambling tendency.

The gaming machine of the second aspect of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine of the first aspect,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to the advantageous state when a variable display is executed and the variable display result becomes a specific result (e.g., a jackpot),
The adjustment means adjusts the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the second value so as to be longer than the variable display period of the variable display executed when the predetermined numerical data is the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2" (when the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state), the special chart variable display period in each variation pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" (when the ball output state is the low ball output state)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by lengthening the variable display period, the time interval during which the advantageous state occurs when the specified numerical data is the second value can be lengthened, so that the speed at which the game value is awarded when the specified numerical data is the second value can be slowed down without reducing the game value awarded in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the characteristic part 162SG is the gaming machine of the first or second aspect,
The advantageous state includes an awardable period during which game value can be awarded (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-20, the period of each round of play during which the large prize opening is in an open state) and an unawardable period during which game value cannot be awarded (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-20, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during which the large prize opening is in a closed state),
The adjustment means adjusts the period during which the advantageous state cannot be granted, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the second value, so as to be longer than the period during which the advantageous state cannot be granted, which is controlled when the predetermined numerical data is the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-21, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" or "2", the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending period during the jackpot game are set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is "0");
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by lengthening the non-awarding period during which the game value is not awarded, it is possible to slow down the awarding speed of the game value when the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the characteristic part 162SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The game device includes an advantageous state type determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes a process (step 162 SGS 154) for determining the type of jackpot in the normal process for special symbols shown in FIG. 14-16 ) capable of determining whether the advantageous state is a first advantageous state (for example, a sure-win B) or a second advantageous state (for example, a sure-win A) in which the amount of game value awarded is greater than that of the first advantageous state,
The adjustment means adjusts the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determination means when the predetermined numerical data is the second value so as to be higher than the rate at which the first advantageous state is determined by the advantageous state type determination means when the predetermined numerical data is the first value (for example, as shown in modified example 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination rate of the special jackpot A is lowered as the jackpot type and the determination rate of the special jackpot B is increased compared to when the ball output state is a low ball output state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the specified numerical data is the second value, it becomes easier to determine the first advantageous state in which the amount of game value awarded is small, so that the amount of game value awarded when the specified numerical data is the second value can be reduced, and as a result, the speed at which game value is awarded when the specified numerical data is the second value can be slowed down.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the characteristic portion 162SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The adjustment means adjusts the rate at which the advantageous period end determination means determines the end of the advantageous period when the predetermined numerical data is the second value to be higher than the rate at which the advantageous period end determination means determines the end of the advantageous period when the predetermined numerical data is the first value (for example, as shown in modified example 162SG-2, a portion that increases the rate at which the jackpot type is determined to be a non-variable jackpot in a high ball output state compared to a low ball output state, and a portion that increases the rate at which the drop-out lottery is won in a high ball output state compared to a low ball output state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the specified numerical data is the second value, the end of the advantageous period is more easily determined and it is more easily controlled to the normal state, so that the number of times consecutive advantageous states occur via special states can be reduced, and as a result, the speed at which game value is awarded can be slowed down when the specified numerical data is the second value.

A gaming machine according to a sixth aspect of the characteristic portion 162SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
The termination condition is that the number of occurrences of the advantageous state that occurred during the advantageous period after the predetermined numerical data was updated from the first value to the second value by the update means has reached the termination determination number (for example, as shown in variant example 162SG-3, a part that controls the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state to a low ball output state on the condition that 100 variable displays have been executed after being controlled to the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be terminated when the advantageous state of the termination judgment number occurs during the advantageous period after the specified numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of the seventh aspect of the characteristic portion 162SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
A gaming machine that can be controlled to the advantageous state when a variable display is executed and the variable display result becomes a specific result (e.g., a jackpot),
The termination condition is that the number of variable displays executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches a termination determination number (for example, the value "100" set as the remaining number of variable displays after determination becomes "0" after 100 variable displays are executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be ended when the variable display of the end determination count is executed after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the previous second value.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 of the characteristic portion 162SG is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
The termination condition is that the magnitude of the game value used in the game after the predetermined numerical data is updated from the first value to the second value by the update means reaches a magnitude for termination judgment (for example, as shown in variant example 162SG-4, after setting the value of the ball output status flag to "1", the value of the ball output status flag is set to "0" based on the total number of game balls that have entered each winning port or entered the outlet port during the consecutive winning state reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the adjustment can be terminated when the magnitude of the game value used in the game after the specified numerical data is updated from a first value to a previous second value reaches a magnitude for termination judgment.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the characteristic portion 162SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
A storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of retaining the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
an initialization means for initializing the contents stored in the storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when power supply to the gaming machine is started (for example, a portion for executing the processes of steps S6a and S6b based on the fact that the restoration condition is not established (step S3; N) when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process shown in FIG. 14-11 at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1);
Equipped with
When the memory contents of the memory means are initialized by the initialization means, the first value is set to the predetermined numerical data (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-11, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to “0” corresponding to the low ball output state in the processing of step S6b).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent adjustment from being made when power supply is started.

The gaming machine of the tenth aspect of the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine of any one of the first to ninth aspects,
a storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of retaining the value of the predetermined numerical data even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the predetermined numerical data is restored based on the value of the predetermined numerical data stored in the storage means (for example, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process shown in FIG. 14-11 at the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the restoration condition is satisfied (step S3; Y), a restoration process (step S4) including an update process of the ball output state flag by the backup data is executed, thereby restoring the ball output state to a high ball output state if the ball output state was high when the power outage occurred, and restoring the ball output state to a low ball output state if the ball output state was low when the power outage occurred).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the specified numerical data at the time of the power outage is the second value, the adjustment can be continued when the power outage is restored.

The gaming machine of aspect 11 having the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 1 to 10,
A notification means capable of notifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, in the ball output state determination process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" in the process of step S162SG06, and then starts turning on the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 in the process of step S162SG08).
It is characterized by the following.
It can be recognized that an adjustment has been made because the predetermined numerical data is the second value.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the eleventh aspect,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A light emitting means having a plurality of light emitting parts (for example, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a high ball output state notification LED 162SG071) whose light emission is controlled by the game control means,
The notification is performed by illuminating the light-emitting unit (for example, a part that notifies the high ball output state by lighting the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, notification can be performed by light emission control common to other light emitting units by the game control means.

The gaming machine of aspect 13 having the characteristic portion 162SG is a gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 12,
A game control means (e.g., a CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A presentation control means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) capable of controlling presentation based on control information (e.g., a presentation control command shown in FIG. 14-2) transmitted from the game control means;
Equipped with
The game control means is capable of transmitting control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value to the performance control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-13, after the CPU 103 executes the sending setting of the ball output state designation command in the processing of step 162SGS17, the part that executes the command control processing shown in FIG. 5);
The presentation control means is capable of executing presentation control based on control information capable of identifying that the predetermined numerical data is the second value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-27 and FIG. 14-28, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of identifying the ball output state from the received ball output state designation command in the preview presentation determination process, and determining whether or not to execute a preview presentation during variable display and the presentation type of the preview presentation to be executed using a preview presentation type determination table corresponding to the identified ball output state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, presentation control can be executed according to whether the predetermined numerical data is the second value or not, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of aspect 14 having the characteristic portion 162SG is the gaming machine of any one of aspects 1 to 13,
A presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CPU 120) is provided that can execute a specific presentation (e.g., a reach presentation) that can suggest that there is a high possibility of control into the advantageous state, and a preview presentation (e.g., a foresight preview presentation) that previews the execution of the specific presentation,
The performance execution means limits the execution of the preview performance during a predetermined period before the update means updates the predetermined numerical data from the second value to the first value (for example, as shown in FIG. 14-23, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the post-determination variable display remaining number is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number in the processing of step 162SGS242b of the pre-reading preview setting processing, and does not execute the pre-reading preview performance if the post-determination variable display remaining number is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number (step 162SGS242b; Y)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the preview performance from becoming inappropriate because adjustment is no longer performed as a result of the specified numerical data being updated from the second value to the first value.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 109SG)
Next, a characteristic feature 109SG in the embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present characteristic feature 109SG) will be described.

Among conventional gaming machines, there is one described in JP 2013-99572 A (Patent Document 1) that can notify the result of a performance by the movement of a movable body (execution of a specific performance) and is equipped with a speaker (sound output means) that can output performance sounds.

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is capable of executing a suggestive effect that suggests that a specific effect will be executed by repeatedly moving a movable body during a period prior to the execution of a specific effect, and is considered to be one that draws the player's attention to whether or not a specific effect will be executed by executing the suggestive effect. Furthermore, with such a gaming machine, it is considered to increase interest in the game by ending the repeated movement of the movable body as a suggestive effect a predetermined period prior to the specific effect, and by making the type of effect sound output from the speaker different before and after the predetermined period (changing the type of effect sound output from the speaker), but there is a problem in that the movement of the movable body makes it difficult to recognize that the type of effect sound output from these speakers has changed before and after the predetermined period.

This invention was made with an eye on such problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy to recognize that the type of sound produced has changed before and after a specified period of time.

Figure 13-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 109SG. As shown in Figure 13-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the rear side of the game board 2.

As shown in FIG. 13-3(A), the movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410. A first movable body 109SG401 is disposed in the center of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, a second movable body 109SG402L is disposed on the left side of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, and a third movable body 109SG402R is disposed on the right side of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction.

The movable body unit 109SG400 also has a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the third movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in this characteristic part 109SG can operate separately from the first movable body 109SG401. In addition, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built into a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, the upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of these first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, and third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 can be moved by the drive of the first movable body motor 109SG421 from a retracted position (see FIG. 13-3(A)) below the image display device 5 to a suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 13-3(B)) and to a performance position above the suggested position and directly in front of the image display device 5 (see FIG. 13-3(C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R can be moved from a retracted position (see FIG. 13-3(A)) below the image display device 5 to positions adjacent to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (see FIG. 13-3(C)) by driving the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423.

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in Figures 13-3 (A) to 13-3 (C), the first state of the movable body unit 109SG400 is a state in which the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all located in the retracted position, the second state of the movable body unit 109SG400 is a state in which the first movable body 109SG401 is located in the suggested position while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located in the retracted position, and the third state of the movable body unit 109SG400 is a state in which the first movable body 109SG401 is located in the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located in positions adjacent to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 located in the performance position.

Figure 13-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 109SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 13-4 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 13-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13-4 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable hit or non-probable hit), and whether it will be a small hit, as the judgment result at the time of winning. In addition, command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 13-4(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 13-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 13-5, in this feature section 109SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. 13-10.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 13-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this characteristic section 109SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature section 109SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 109SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 109SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 109SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 13-6(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 109SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result determination table 2 in this feature section 109SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 13-7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 109SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 109SG will be explained using FIG. 13-7 (B). In this feature section 109SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). And the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" and "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of a special jackpot will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a special jackpot, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the jackpot game state ends, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature section 109SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 13-7(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 13-8 shows the variation patterns in this characteristic part 109SG. In this characteristic part 109SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that in this feature section 109SG, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature section 109SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 13-8, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed in this feature section 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic section 109SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but this invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 13-9 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 109SG. In this feature section 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-9, when the variable display result is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-5 (super reach β2 jackpot fluctuation pattern).

In addition, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using this jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern for super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern for super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern for super reach β1 jackpot), and PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern for super reach β2 jackpot).

As shown in FIG. 13-9, the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1 is the same in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, but the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-2, PB1-3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 are different. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 2 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 45 to PB1-2, 150 to PB1-3, 300 to PB1-4, and 500 to PB1-5. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 2 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 30 to PB1-2, 135 to PB1-3, 315 to PB1-4, and 515 to PB1-5. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, the variable pattern is determined to be PB1-4 or PB1-5, which are the variable patterns of Super Reach β1 and β2, with a higher probability than when the variable display result is not a guaranteed jackpot, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the variable pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variable pattern determination table is selected, and the variable pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variable pattern) using the special hit variable pattern determination table. In other words, in this feature section 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variable pattern whether the variable display result is a special big hit C or a small hit, so it is difficult for the player to determine from the variable pattern whether the variable display result is a special big hit C or a small hit.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β1 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α1 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α1 miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 miss), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 miss).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach β1 miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-5 (super reach β2 miss fluctuation pattern).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature section 109SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved variable charts stored in memory being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figures 13-28 to 13-35, the variable display of super reach α1 in feature section 109SG (variable display of variable patterns PA2-2, PB1-2) has a special chart variable display time of 40 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle presentation between ally character A and enemy character A as the reach presentation of the super reach. The variable display of super reach α2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-3, PB1-3) has a special chart variable display time of 50 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle presentation between ally character A and enemy character B as the reach presentation of the super reach. The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4, PB1-4) has a special chart variable display time of 60 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle presentation between ally character A and enemy character A as the reach presentation of the super reach. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variation patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special chart variable display time of 60 seconds, and is a variable display that executes a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A as a reach performance of the Super Reach.

And, as shown in FIG. 13-9, the jackpot expectancy of each variable display in this feature section 109SG is set highest for Super Reach β2, followed by Super Reach β1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach α1, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach in descending order (jackpot expectancy of each variable display in this feature section 109SG: Super Reach β2 > Super Reach β1 > Super Reach α2 > Super Reach α1 > Normal Reach > Non-Reach).

In other words, when we look at the variable display of the Super Reach, in this feature section 109SG, the expectation of a big win differs depending on the combination of whether the ally character displayed in the battle performance (Super Reach Reach performance) is ally character A or ally character B, and whether the enemy character displayed in the battle performance (Super Reach Reach performance) is enemy character A or enemy character B.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 109SG is provided with a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 13-10, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 13-10 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 109SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 109SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 109SG151C, a game control flag setting section 109SG152, a game control timer setting section 109SG153, a game control counter setting section 109SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 109SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 109SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 109SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 109SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 13-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 13-11(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 109SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 109SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 109SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 109SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 13-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 109SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 109SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A of this feature section 109SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a reserved display flag, to which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the reserved memory display is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)), and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 109SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 109SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 13-11(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 13-11(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature unit 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described based on FIG. 13-12. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (step 109SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" (step 109SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N), or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 109SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 109SGS101b; Y), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" (step 109SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 109SGS103 or step 109SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 (step 109SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display state including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 109SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

Following the processing of step 109SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 109SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 109SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 13-13 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of a process executed in step 109SGS112 in Figure 13-12 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 109SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S22 in Figure 5, Figure 13-11) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S23 in Figure 5, Figure 13-12) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 109SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 109SGS121, the special chart display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 13-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 13-12 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the result is not within the jackpot determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a jackpot (step 109SGS123; N), the special chart display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 13-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 109SGS109 in FIG. 13-12 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 109SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if it is judged that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 109SGS126), a variable pattern judgment table for special wins is selected and set (step 109SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" (step 109SGS128), is executed, and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 109SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 109SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four, prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 13-9, of these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, in miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns, and in miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to non-reach fluctuation patterns. On the other hand, in the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach, which is within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 109SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 13-13(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 109SGS135), and proceeds to step 109SGS138.

Also, if the determined jackpot type is a guaranteed jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B (step 109SGS136), and proceed to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for the variable pattern judgment (step 109SGS138). In this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 109SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 109SGS132), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. Figure 13-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 of Figure 6. In the command analysis process shown in Figure 13-14, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15, for example by checking the contents stored in the performance control command receiving buffer (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If a command is received in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate winning at the first starting port, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command (step 109SGS222).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is not a command to designate a win at the first starting port (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a command to designate a win at the second starting port (step 109SGS224).

If the received command in step 109SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command in step 109SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command in step 109SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the received command in step 109SGS228 is not the first pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS230).

If the received command in step 109SGS222 is a first start port winning designation command (step 109SGS222; Y), if the received command in step 109SGS224 is a second start port winning designation command (step 109SGS224; Y), if the received command in step 109SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), or if the received command in step 109SGS227 is a variable category command (step 1 If the command received in step 109SGS227 is the first pending memory count notification command (109SGS228; Y), or if the command received in step 109SGS230 is the second pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS230; Y), the received command is stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 13-11 (step 109SGS233), and processing returns to step 109SGS221.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A.

If the received command in step 109SGS230 is not the second pending memory count notification command (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other received commands (step 109SGS234), and processing returns to step 109SGS221.

In particular, in the processing of this characteristic section 162SGS234, if the received command is a first ball output state designation command, it determines that the ball output state is a low ball output state and sets (updates) the value of the ball output state flag for presentation to "0", if the received command is a second ball output state designation command, it determines that the ball output state is a first high ball output state and sets (updates) the value of the ball output state flag for presentation to "1", and if the received command is a third ball output state designation command, it determines that the ball output state is a second high ball output state and sets (updates) the value of the ball output state flag for presentation to "2".

In addition, in the command analysis process of this characteristic part 109SG, if the received command is a start port winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, or a reserved memory number notification command, the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free space in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A, but this invention is not limited to this. If the received command is a start port winning designation command, a timer is set to wait for the reception of the reserved memory number notification command, and if the reserved memory number notification command is not received before the timer times out, the entry reserved memory that has not received the reserved memory number notification command may be set as not being subject to the pre-reading preview performance described below.

Figure 13-15 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the pre-reading notice setting process shown in Figure 13-15, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241) and determines whether there is a reserved memory (entry) with the reserved display flag not set (step 109SGS242a). If there is no reserved memory with the reserved display flag not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process ends, and if there is a reserved memory with the reserved display flag not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), it further determines whether the reach performance of the Super Reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

Whether or not a Super Reach reach performance is in progress can be determined by checking whether the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (whether or not variable display is in progress), and if the value of the performance control process flag is 2, the contents of the process data for the variable display being executed can be referenced to determine whether or not a Super Reach reach performance is in progress.

If the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), proceed to step 109SGS250. If the reach effect of the Super Reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry (entry in which the reserved display flag is not set) is a symbol designation command indicating a small win (step 109SGS243a). If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small win (step 109SGS243a; Y), proceed to step 109SGS250. If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a miss or a big win (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a first symbol designation command (a symbol designation command indicating a miss) (step 109SGS243b).

If the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, i.e., if the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), the type of jackpot is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the type of jackpot identified in step 109SGS244, a look-ahead preview performance judgment table at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the display pattern when the look-ahead preview performance is executed (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 13-16 is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type). In the example of the determination ratio setting shown in FIG. 13-16, the determination ratio for whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type) is varied depending on the type of jackpot identified in the processing of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white square (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed as a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

Also, as shown in FIG. 13-16, when the jackpot type is a "probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is a "non-probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" and display pattern β is executed as the display pattern (notice type), the probability that the jackpot type will be a special jackpot is higher than when display pattern α is executed, increasing the player's anticipation of a special jackpot.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is always decided, and one of the display patterns, display pattern α in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) or display pattern β in which the reserved memory display is displayed in a white star (☆), is executed; however, this invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a jackpot, there may be a case where it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, just as when the variable display result is a "miss."

In addition, in step 109SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of an entry whose display pending flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 109SGS243b; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry whose display pending flag is on is identified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 109SGS247, the pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) is made using a decision ratio such as that shown in FIG. 13-16. In the example of the decision ratio setting shown in FIG. 13-16, the decision ratio as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 109SGS247.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types): display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a specific form of a white square (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U, and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a specific form of a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U. In addition, when the pre-reading notice performance is determined to be non-executed, the reserved memory display is displayed in a normal form of a circle (○) in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D or the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U.

As shown in FIG. 13-16, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable category is "other", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable pattern category is "other", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach", and if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss," the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined not to be executed is set to the highest, regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach," "other," or "super reach," and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the predictive preview performance is not determined to be non-executed (no preview performance), and the rate at which the predictive preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern α or display pattern β is determined is set to be higher than the rate at which display pattern α or display pattern β is determined in any of the variable pattern categories when the variable display result is a "miss."

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "Miss (non-reach)", "Miss (super reach)", or "Miss (other)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern α is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "jackpot (probable jackpot)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" than when display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed); in particular, when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the probability that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be a "probable jackpot" increases, thereby increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

After executing step 109SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 109SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, that is, whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 109SGS249).

After step 109SGS245 is executed or if it is decided to execute the preview performance (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the decided display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is display pattern α showing the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) decided in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is display pattern β showing the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Also, in step 109SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 109SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white "circle" (step 109SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

As mentioned above, even when the reach effect of the Super Reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small win (step 109SGS243a), the pending display flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating a white "circle" (step 109SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the hold display flag set to "0", "1", or "2". Also, when the variable display is executed and the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the hold display of the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U located at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, as shown in FIG. 13-17.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-17, if the number of first special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 13-17, if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of first special reserved memories is two, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special memory, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of second special reserved memories is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 13-17, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory, for example, the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the reserved memory display of 1 is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a manner corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a manner corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

And each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and the reserved memory display also shifts in a predetermined shift direction (towards the center of the screen in this feature part 109SG), as shown in FIG. 13-17.

In other words, when the reserved memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described below, which is executed when the variable display starts, and the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed based on the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A after the shift, and if there is a new reserved memory due to the start winning, the display pattern of that reserved memory is determined and set in the reserved display flag, and it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 109SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 109SG005U in a display mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag.

Note that, in this characteristic section 109SG, an example is shown in which the processing of step 109SGS252 is executed in the advance notice setting process, but the invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the hold display in the first hold memory display area 109SG005D and the second hold memory display area 109SG005U may be executed separately as a process different from the advance notice setting process (for example, a hold display update process).

In addition, in this characteristic part 109SG, a decision is made in step 109SGS242 as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory at the start winning, on the condition that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning. However, if a start winning at the first start winning port and a start winning at the second start winning port occur simultaneously, and it is determined in step 109SGS242 that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning in both the first special chart and the second special chart, in other words, if an entry with the display pending flag in the on state exists in both the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory, then both entries are subject to the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance. If the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special chart is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special chart is newly stored are both targets for deciding whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed simultaneously in both the pending display of the pending memory of the first special chart and the pending display of the second special chart.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, as described above, when a start winning entry into the first start winning port and a start winning entry into the second start winning port occur simultaneously, both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the first special chart is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the second special chart is newly stored are subject to the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and in such a case, it may be decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, or to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart.

Figure 13-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 109SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 109SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small jackpot. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three symbols are aligned as even numbers as the stopping symbols. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping symbols are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping symbols are determined to be decorative patterns in which three symbols are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping symbols, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping symbol, and determine the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol using a stopping symbol determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative symbols is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative symbols that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 109SGS282).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 109SGS283). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 109SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 109SGS284). The variable display control timer is also set to a first time (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the first time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of moving images of other performances (see Figure 13-20).

The performance control CPU 120 also determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 109SGS287). If the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 109SGS287; Y), a second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 controls the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 every time the first time elapses. This realizes movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (see FIG. 13-20).

After execution of step 109SGS288, or if the variable display fluctuation pattern is not a Super Reach fluctuation pattern (step 109SGS287; N), the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance processing (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 109SGS286).

Figure 13-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 reduces the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by 1 (steps 109SGS301, 109SGS302, and 109SGS303). In addition, if the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable object control timer is reduced by 1 (step 109SGS303c).

After executing step 109SGS303c, or if there is no variable display of the Super Reach (step 109SGS303b; N), proceed to step 109SGS306.

In step 109SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 109SGS308). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the processing of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variable display is a Super Reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

If the variable display is a Super Reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether the movable body control timer has timed out (109SGS309g). If the movable body control timer has timed out (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data (step 109SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the movable body control timer is set to the second time again) and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not a Super Reach variable display (step 109SGS309f; N) and the movable object control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS309g; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 without executing the processes of steps 109SGS309h and 109SGS309i.

Next, it is confirmed whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 109SGS310; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen (the screen to be displayed 33 ms after the previous image update time) that includes the left, center, and right decorative patterns during the variable display, and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative patterns and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, the first time is reset to the variable display control timer (step 109SGS312).

Also, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 109SGS313). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern determination command is received, the control will transition to one that stops the variation. For example, even if a variable pattern specification command is received that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 109SGS306, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

Next, we will explain the operation of each presentation device during the reach presentation of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 in feature section 109SG. We will explain the presentation mode of the variable display based on Figures 13-21 to 13-24.

First, as shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-22, for the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, when the reach performance of Super Reach α1 or Super Reach α2 begins, the enlarged display of the character images (ally character A and enemy character A in the reach performance of Super Reach α1, and ally character A and enemy character B in the reach performance of Super Reach α2) displayed on the image display device 5 is executed during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period.

Specifically, during the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from the normal display magnification (1x) to display magnification m1, during the second enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from display magnification m1 to display magnification m2, and during the third enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged at a constant speed from display magnification m2 to display magnification m3. After the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification when the predetermined period has elapsed.

In this characteristic section 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Also, as shown in Figs. 13-21 and 13-22, the difference between each display magnification is the largest between the normal display magnification and display magnification m1, and the smallest between display magnification m2 and display magnification m3. In other words, in this characteristic section 109SG, the enlargement speed of the character image is set to be the fastest during the first enlarged display period and the slowest during the third enlarged display period (enlargement speed of the character image: first enlarged display period > second enlarged display period > third enlarged display period). In this characteristic section 109SG, "fast enlargement speed" refers to a large image enlargement rate per unit time.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the period consisting of the first and second enlarged display periods (the period during which the movable body movement suggestion performance is executed) may be referred to as period T2, and the period consisting of the third enlarged display period and a predetermined period during which the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 may be referred to as period T3.

As shown in FIG. 13-21, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to positions close to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 (after the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retreat positions (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) to execute movable body operation performance A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-22, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, if the variable display result is a miss, a miss notification performance is executed to notify the user that the variable display result is a miss by not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display.

Hereinafter, in this feature section 109SG, the execution period of the movable object performance A and the miss notification performance may be referred to as period T4. Of these periods T2 to T4, period T3 is the shortest period and period T4 is the longest period (length of periods T2 to T4: period T4 > period T2 > period T3).

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, effect images are also displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body action suggestion performance A and movable body action performance A (only when the variable display result is a jackpot).

Specifically, as shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-22, the image display device 5 executes movable body operation suggestion performance A, in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period).

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as part of the movable body operation presentation A described above, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move (spread) from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2 over a period T4. The absolute value of speed V2 is greater than the absolute value of speed V1. In other words, the movable body operation presentation A in this feature portion 109SG is also a presentation in which the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move faster than the movable body operation suggestion presentation A.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, the movable body LED 109SG495 is also illuminated. Specifically, as shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-22, the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated at brightness C1 during the aforementioned period T2 (the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period) and during the middle of period T3 (more precisely, from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Furthermore, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated at brightness C2, which is higher than brightness C1, during period T4.

In addition, during the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, four types of sound effects can be output from speakers 8L and 8R: background music such as music, SE (sound effects), action suggestion sounds, and jackpot notification sounds. The type of sound output varies depending on the time during the reach performance.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-22, BGM is a performance sound that is output from speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped only during period T3. In other words, the output of BGM during the reach performance is executed from the start timing of the reach performance to the end timing of period T2, and over period T4.

Sound effects (SE) are also sound effects that are output from speakers 8L, 8R from the start of the variable display, just like background music, but unlike background music, there is no period during which output from speakers 8L, 8R is stopped. In other words, the output of SEs in reach performances is executed throughout the entire reach performance.

The action suggestion sound is a sound effect output from speakers 8L, 8R as part of movable body action suggestion performance A. In other words, the action suggestion sound is output only during period T2, which is the execution period of movable body action suggestion performance A, and is not output during any other period. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect output from speakers 8L, 8R as part of movable body action performance A. In other words, the jackpot notification sound is output only during period T4, which is the execution period of movable body action performance A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output during any other period.

As shown in Figures 13-23 and 13-24, for the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, when the reach performance of Super Reach β1 or Super Reach β2 begins, the character images (ally character B and enemy character A in the reach performance of Super Reach β1, and ally character B and enemy character B in the reach performance of Super Reach β2) displayed on the image display device 5 during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period are enlarged.

Hereinafter, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, the light emission state of the movable body LED 109SG495, and the output of BGM, SE, action suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from speakers 8L and 8R will be omitted because they are the same as the variable display of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2 shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-22.

As shown in FIG. 13-23, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a jackpot, from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retreat position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to a position close to the first movable body 109SG401 (after the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to their respective retreat positions (the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the third state to the first state), and movable body operation performance B is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13-24, during the reach performance of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, if the variable display result is a miss, a miss notification performance is executed from the end timing of period T3 to the end timing of the variable display by not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, which notifies the player that the variable display result is a miss. Movable body performance B is a performance executed over period T4, just like the movable body performance A and the miss notification performance described above.

During the reach performance of Super Reach β1 and Super Reach β2, as shown in Figures 13-23 and 13-24, a movable body operation suggestion performance B is executed in which the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved (reciprocated) between the retracted position and the suggested position over the aforementioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period). Note that the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position during the movable body operation suggestion performance B is shorter than the aforementioned period T3 (length of periods T1 to T4: period T4 > period T2 > period T3 > period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2, as shown in FIG. 13-25, the movable body movement suggestion effect is executed in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, but the movable body movement suggestion effect is not executed in the third enlarged display period. Also, among the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the first enlarged display period is set to have the fastest enlargement speed of the character image (largest image enlargement rate per unit time), and the third enlarged display period is set to have the slowest enlargement speed of the character image (smallest image enlargement rate per unit time).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-26(A), comparing movable body operation suggestion performance A and movable body operation suggestion performance B, movable body operation suggestion performance A is a performance in which a star-shaped effect image 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 on the image display device 5 (multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself does not move, whereas movable body operation suggestion performance B is a performance in which the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between a retracted position and a suggested position, which is different. On the other hand, movable body operation suggestion performance A and movable body operation suggestion performance B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at a brightness C1 during the performance period.

As shown in Figure 13-26 (B), comparing movable body operation performance A and movable body operation performance B, movable body operation performance A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from a retracted position to a performance position, and moves the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R to positions close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S spread out from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2. Movable body operation performance B is a performance in which the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to a position close to the first movable body that has been moved to the performance position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and differs from movable body operation performance A in that the display of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S diffusing from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 is not executed. Furthermore, both movable body operation performance A and movable body operation performance B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at brightness C1 during the execution period of the performance.

Next, the display mode of the reach performance on the image display device 5 in the variable display of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 will be explained based on Figures 13-27 to 13-35.

First, as shown in Figures 13-27 (A) and 13-27 (B), a short time after the variable display of either Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, or Super Reach β2 begins, the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R stop in a combination indicating a reach. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed in this reach state, if the variable display is a variable display of super reach α1, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character A will start as a reach performance (see Figures 13-27(C) and 13-28(A)), if the variable display is a variable display of super reach α2, a battle performance between ally character A and enemy character B will start as a reach performance (see Figures 13-27(D) and 13-30(A)), if the variable display is a variable display of super reach β1, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character A will start as a reach performance (see Figures 13-27(E) and 13-32(A)), and if the variable display is a variable display of super reach β2, a battle performance between ally character B and enemy character B will start as a reach performance (see Figures 13-27(F) and 13-34(A)).

When the reach performance of these super reaches begins, the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L and the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R are moved to the upper left and right ends of the display area of the image display device 5, respectively, and the decorative pattern displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5Cni becomes temporarily invisible.

As shown in Fig. 13-28(A) and Fig. 13-28(B), when the second half of the battle presentation, which is the reach presentation of Super Reach α1, begins, as shown in Fig. 13-28(C), a video of ally character A attacking enemy character A starts to be displayed. During the video, as shown in Fig. 13-28(C) to Fig. 13-28(F), during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period, the images of ally character A and enemy character A are enlarged when ally character A is about to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character A.

In particular, during the first and second enlarged display periods (FIGS. 13-28(D) to 13-28(F)), the images of ally character A and enemy character A are displayed on the image display device 5 with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period (FIGS. 13-28(A) to 13-28(C)), and an image (movable body action suggestion performance A) of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S moving at speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed superimposed on the low-contrast images of ally character A and enemy character A. At this time, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can easily recognize the movement of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-28(E) to FIG. 13-28(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character A and enemy character A are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated during the predetermined period.

As shown in Figures 13-29 (H) and 13-29 (I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping the images of ally character A and enemy character A, as movable body operation presentation A, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective evacuation positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character A and ally character A winning, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 13-29(J) and FIG. 13-29(K), a miss notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character A hits ally character A and the ally character is defeated, and it is notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state (a miss). At this time, on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in FIG. 13-29(I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a miss, and then stops while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 13-30(A) and Fig. 13-30(B), when the battle performance (reach performance) for the reach performance of Super Reach α2 reaches the latter half, a video of ally character A attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed as shown in Fig. 13-30(C). During the video, as shown in Fig. 13-30(C) to Fig. 13-30(F), the images of ally character A and enemy character B are enlarged in a scene where ally character A is about to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character B during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period described above.

In particular, during the first and second enlarged display periods (FIGS. 13-30(D) to 13-30(F)), the images of ally character A and enemy character B are displayed on the image display device 5 with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period (FIGS. 13-30(A) to 13-30(C)), and an image (movable body action suggestion performance A) of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S moving at speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed superimposed on the low-contrast images of ally character A and enemy character B. At this time, the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, so that the player can easily recognize the movement of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S toward the first movable body 109SG401 at speed V1.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-30(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character A and enemy character B are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated during the predetermined period.

As shown in Figures 13-31(G) to 13-31(I), when the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping the images of ally character A and enemy character B, as movable body operation presentation A, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective retreat positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video of ally character A's attack hitting enemy character B and ally character A winning, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 13-31(J) and FIG. 13-31(K), a miss notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character B hits ally character A and the ally character is defeated, and it is notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state (a miss). At this time, on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in FIG. 13-29(I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a miss, and then stops while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Figures 13-32(A) and 13-32(B), when the battle performance (reach performance) for Super Reach β1 reaches the latter half, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character A begins to be displayed as shown in Figure 13-32(C). During the video, as shown in Figures 13-32(C) to 13-32(F), the images of ally character B and enemy character A are enlarged when ally character B attempts to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character A during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period described above.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved between the retracted position and the suggested position as movable body operation suggestion performance B (the movable body unit 109SG400 is repeatedly changed from the first state to the second state and from the second state to the first state).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-32(D) and FIG. 13-32(E), during the period when the images of ally character B and enemy character A are being enlarged, an effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5, and the enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A is emphasized by the effect image 109SG005X.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-32(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character B and enemy character A are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated during the predetermined period.

As shown in Figures 13-33(G) to 13-33(I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping the images of ally character B and enemy character A, as movable body operation presentation B.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective retreat positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video in which ally character B's attack hits enemy character A and ally character A wins, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Fig. 13-33(J) and Fig. 13-33(K), a miss notification effect is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character A hits ally character B and the ally character is defeated, and it is notified that the game is not controlled to a jackpot game state (a miss). At this time, on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5C on the "right") moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in Fig. 13-29(I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the fact that the variable display result is a miss, and then stops while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in Fig. 13-34(A) and Fig. 13-34(B), when the battle performance (reach performance) for Super Reach β2 reaches the latter half, a video of ally character B attacking enemy character B starts to be displayed as shown in Fig. 13-34(C). During the video, as shown in Fig. 13-34(C) to Fig. 13-34(F), the images of ally character B and enemy character B are enlarged when ally character B is about to launch a close-combat attack on enemy character B during the first enlarged display period, second enlarged display period, and third enlarged display period described above.

In particular, during the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly moved between the retracted position and the suggested position as movable body operation suggestion performance B (the movable body unit 109SG400 is repeatedly changed from the first state to the second state and from the second state to the first state).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13-34(D) and FIG. 13-34(E), during the period when the images of ally character B and enemy character A are being enlarged, effect image 109SG005X is displayed on image display device 5, and effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of ally character B and enemy character A.

In addition, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 provided on the first movable body 109SG401 also emits light at brightness C1.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-34(F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, friendly character B and enemy character B are displayed at display magnification m3 for a predetermined period. Note that the movable body LED 109SG495 is not illuminated during the predetermined period.

As shown in Figures 13-35(G) to 13-35(I), if the variable display result is a jackpot, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, overlapping the images of ally character B and enemy character B, as movable body operation presentation B, and multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed moving from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2.

Furthermore, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the performance position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to adjacent positions on the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the performance position (the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). In other words, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed, and the movement of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to their respective retreat positions is completed, and the image display device 5 displays a video in which ally character B's attack hits enemy character B and ally character A wins, and it is notified that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns (the decorative patterns displayed in each of the "right" decorative pattern display areas 5C) move at high speed from the back to the front of the image display device 5 as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a jackpot, and then stop while swinging in the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbols ends (the small symbols displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stop in a combination indicating a jackpot), the game is controlled to enter a jackpot game state.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in Figures 13-35 (J) and 13-35 (K), a miss notification is displayed on the image display device 5 in which an attack from enemy character B hits ally character B, causing the ally character to be defeated, and it is notified that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state (that it is a miss).
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative pattern (the decorative pattern displayed in each decorative pattern display area 5C on the "right") moves from the top of the image display device 5 at a slow speed (slower than the jackpot shown in Figure 13-29 (I)) as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a miss, and then stops while oscillating in the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic part 109SG, as shown in Figs. 10-31 to 13-35, does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body operation suggestion performance B is being performed, but displays the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body operation performance B is being performed. Therefore, by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B, it is possible to make the enlarged display of the images of the friendly characters and enemy characters during the reach performance and the performance action of the movable body operation performance B by the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) more noticeable, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, the enlargement speed of the images of each character is different between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, which improves the presentation effect during the enlarged display period. In addition, the movement speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, which reduces the control load on the first movable body 109SG401 during the movable body movement presentation.

As shown in Figs. 13-21 to 13-24, the enlargement speed during the second enlargement display period is slower than that during the first enlargement display period, and the enlargement speed during the third enlargement display period after the movable body operation suggestion effect ends is even slower than that during the second enlargement display period, so that the enlarged display of the images of the ally character and enemy character continues even after the movable body operation suggestion effect ends, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Note that, in this characteristic section 109SG, an example is given in which the enlargement speed during the first enlargement display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed during the third enlargement display period is the slowest, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement speed during the third enlargement display period may be the fastest and the enlargement speed during the first enlargement display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed during the second enlargement display period may be the fastest.

As shown in Figs. 13-21 to 13-24, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted during the reach performance including the enlarged display period, so that it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the reach performance from being reduced by the execution of the pre-reading preview performance. Note that, although this characteristic section 109SG illustrates an example of a form in which the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted throughout the entire execution period of the reach performance, this invention is not limited to this, and the period in which the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted may be only a part of the reach performance (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Also, this characteristic section 109SG illustrates an example of a form in which the pre-reading preview performance is not executed during the reach performance as a form of restricting the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading preview performance may be executed at a lower rate during the reach performance than in other periods.

As shown in Figs. 13-32 and 13-34, the player can see the reach effect while the movable body action suggestion effect B is being executed, but as shown in Figs. 13-33 and 13-35, the visibility of the reach effect is reduced by displaying an explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body action effect B is being executed. In other words, the visibility of the reach effect effect images (images of friendly characters and enemy characters) changes depending on the movement status of the first movable body 109SG401, making it easier to tell whether the movement of the first movable body 109SG401 is an action as a movable body action suggestion effect or an action as a movable body action effect, and the attention level of the first movable body 109SG401 and the reach effect effect effect image can be adjusted.

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-21 and 13-23, while the movable object movement suggestion presentation is being executed, background music, sound effects, and movement suggestion sounds are output from speakers 8L and 8R, while background music, sound effects, and a jackpot notification sound are output from speakers 8L and 8R, so that the player can easily recognize that the presentation sounds output from speakers 8L and 8R are changing before and after the period from the end of the third expanded display period to the start timing of the movable object movement presentation.

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, period T3 is longer than period T1 required for one reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position, and period T3 is shorter than period T2 for executing the movable body operation suggestion presentation. This prevents the player from mistaking the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation suggestion presentation for the action of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation suggestion presentation, and also prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the movable body operation suggestion presentation period being longer than the movable body operation presentation period in the reach presentation of the suggested target.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, by turning off the movable body LED 109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation display or the miss notification display, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating during the period when the movable body LED 109SG495 is off.

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-32 and 13-34, in movable body movement suggestion presentation B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is moved, and as shown in Figures 13-33 and 13-35, in movable body movement presentation B, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all moved, making it easier for the player to distinguish whether the movement of the movable body is a movement as part of the movable body movement suggestion presentation or a movement as part of the movable body movement presentation.

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated at brightness C1, and while the movable body operation presentation is being performed, the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated at brightness C2, which is brighter than brightness C1. Therefore, the brightness of the movable body LED 109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body operation presentation is being performed, and also increases the player's interest in playing while the movable body operation presentation is being performed.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-28 and 13-30, while movable body action suggestion performance A is being performed, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach performance images (images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B) are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period. In other words, the visibility of the reach performance images decreases while movable body action suggestion performance A is being performed, so the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S can be made to stand out, and the movement of these star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at speed V1 can draw the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401, thereby enhancing the performance effect of the action of the first movable body 109SG401.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13-29 and 13-31, when movable body operation presentation A is being executed, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 moving from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2 that is faster than speed V1. This makes the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in movable body operation presentation A, and the movement of these multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at speed V2 draws the player's attention to the first movable body 109SG401. This enhances the presentation effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Also, as shown in Figures 13-28 (F) and 13-30 (F), before the movable body operation effect A or the miss notification effect is executed, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is hidden on the image display device 5, making it easier for the player to recognize that the effect that is about to be executed is the movable body operation effect or the miss notification effect.

The characteristic features 109SG of this invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic features, and changes and additions that do not deviate from the gist of this invention are also included in this invention.

For example, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in Figs. 13-21 to 13-24, the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, the start timing of the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position and the start timing of the enlarged display of the effect images (images of the friendly character and enemy character) of the reach effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, if the start timing of the movable body operation suggestion effect is set to a timing prior to the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the player's attention can be increased to the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body operation suggestion effect.

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example is given in which the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the enlarged display period is almost the same as the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period (only the display magnification differs slightly), but the invention is not limited to this, and for example, as a modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 may be made different from that immediately before the end of the enlarged display period by displaying a specific performance or an effect image on the image display device 5. In this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the end of the enlarged display period.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an example was given of a form in which the image display device 5 can display an explosion effect image 109SG005B in response to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during a reach performance, but the invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-3, the image display device 5 may be capable of displaying an effect image in response to the progress of a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character that is executed as a reach performance.

In this way, when the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both the explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation, the size of the explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation may be made different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle presentation during the reach presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the image display device 5 is capable of displaying both an explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and an effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation, the image transparency of the explosion effect image 109SG005B corresponding to the movement of the movable body and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the battle presentation may be made different. In this way, the image display device 5 can display an effect image with an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle presentation during the reach presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, a form in which the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character on the image display device 5 is not changed during the period from the end of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-4, during the period from the end of the movable body operation suggestion performance and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance, the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be reduced by setting the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 to a first low visibility state that is lower than that before the enlarged display period ends. Furthermore, when the movable body operation performance is executed (when the variable display result is a jackpot), the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be further reduced by setting the contrast and brightness on the image display device 5 to a second low visibility state that is even lower than the first low visibility state. By doing this, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the reduced visibility of the friendly and enemy characters on the image display device 5, and when the movable body performance is being performed, attention can be increased to the movements of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, as shown in Figs. 13-28 to 13-35, the same presentation image (same ally character and enemy character) is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation and during the execution of the movable body action presentation, but the invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-5, different presentation images may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation. In particular, the number of types of presentation images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation may be greater than the number of types of presentation images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation. In this way, the number of variations of presentation images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body action suggestion presentation can be increased, thereby increasing the interest in playing when the movable body action suggestion presentation is executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 13-28 to 13-35, the characteristic section 109SG exemplifies a form in which the same performance image (same ally character and enemy character) is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of a movable body action suggestion performance and during the execution of a movable body action performance, but the invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 109SG-6, while the movable body action suggestion performance is being executed, the image display device 5 may display a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image that corresponds to the movable body action suggestion performance, while while the movable body action performance is being executed, the image display device 5 may display an image different from the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image as the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding to the movable body action performance.

Furthermore, when movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding images and movable body motion performance corresponding images can be displayed on the image display device 5, the display period of the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding images and the display period of the movable body motion performance corresponding images can be made different. In this way, it becomes possible to display the movable body motion suggestion performance corresponding images and the movable body motion performance corresponding images for an appropriate period corresponding to the operation (whether the movable body motion suggestion performance is being executed or the movable body motion performance is being executed) of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R.

Furthermore, when the movable body operation performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, the visibility of the movable body operation performance corresponding image may be reduced by lowering the contrast or brightness of the image display device 5. In this way, when a movable body operation performance is executed, the player's attention can be increased to the movable body operation performance rather than the movable body operation performance corresponding image.

Furthermore, when a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image may be output from the speaker 8L8R, and when a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5, a movable body action suggestion performance corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body action performance corresponding image may be output from the speaker 8L8R. In this way, sounds corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body action suggestion performance is being performed and when the movable body action performance is being performed can be output from the speakers 8L, 8R, so that the player can easily recognize that the movable body action suggestion performance or the movable body action performance is being performed.

Furthermore, when a movable body action presentation is executed during a reach presentation (when the variable display result is a jackpot), the image display device 5 may start displaying an image corresponding to the movable body action presentation from a timing prior to the start of the movable body action presentation. This can heighten the player's anticipation for the movable body action presentation to start during the reach presentation of a super reach, and can also increase attention to the movable body action presentation.

In the characteristic portion 109SG, in the reach performance of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, a form in which a display is executed in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1 on the image display device 5 as the movable body operation suggestion performance A has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 109SG-7, the speed V1 may be variable within a predetermined range rather than a constant speed. In this case, for example, as the movable body operation suggestion performance A, when the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is changed to a slower speed as they approach the first movable body 109SG401 (the speed V1 is changed to a slower speed). In addition, the speed V2 of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S when the movable body operation presentation A is being performed may be set to a speed faster than the maximum speed V1. By doing this, the movement speed (speed V1) of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes when the movable body operation suggestion presentation A is being performed, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example is given of a form in which one action suggestion sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of a movable body action suggestion performance, and one jackpot notification sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R in response to the execution of a movable body action performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple sounds may be output as the action suggestion sound and jackpot notification sound output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Furthermore, in cases where multiple sounds can be output as the action suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound from speakers 8L, 8R, multiple output start timings for the action suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound may be provided, and different sounds may be output from speakers 8L, 8R depending on the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound or jackpot notification sound starts. In this way, the player can easily recognize that a movable body action suggestion performance or a movable body action performance is being performed by the sounds output from speakers 8L, 8R, and since these action suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change depending on the output timing, interest in the game can be increased.

In particular, when the output timing of the action suggestion sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios depending on the variable display result. In this case, the player can be drawn to the timing at which the output of the action suggestion sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios depending on the type of jackpot or the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, the player can be drawn to the timing at which the output of the jackpot notification sound starts, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 109SG, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, an example is shown in which the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, but this invention is not limited to this. When the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body operation suggestion performance, the first movable body 109SG401 may be stopped once at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated in a position near the retracted position and the suggested position. In this way, it is possible to prevent loss of synchronism in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, after the movable body operation suggestion performance is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to wait in a retreat position until the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the movable body operation suggestion performance is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 may be made to wait in the suggested position until the movable body operation performance or the miss notification performance is started. In this way, when the movable body operation performance is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the performance position, which can increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, after the movable body operation suggestion performance is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained in the suggested position, which can arouse the player's anticipation for the movable body operation performance to be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in Figures 13-21 to 13-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same when the movable body operation suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body operation performance is executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 may be different when the movable body operation suggestion performance is executed and when the movable body operation performance is executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-20, an example is given in which the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) are each executed based on a control timer, but the invention is not limited to this. In addition to the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movement control of the movable bodies, the lighting control of the LEDs provided on the pachinko game machine 1 and the output control of the effect sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R may also be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

When performing the update control of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LEDs, and the output control of the performance sound, for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt every 1 ms (S73 to S77 of the performance control main process shown in FIG. 8 are executed every 1 ms), and the update control of the performance image is executed every 33 ms, the movement control of the movable body is executed every 1 ms, the lighting control of the LEDs is executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the performance sound is executed every 1 ms. In particular, when the update control of the performance image, the lighting control of the LEDs, and the output control of the performance sound are executed, the movement control of the movable body (the drive control of the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423) is always executed, so that the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the performance image, the lighting control of the LEDs, and the output control of the performance sound can be executed suitably.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example is given of a form in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated while the movable body operation suggestion performance is being executed, but this invention is not limited to this, and multiple illumination modes of the movable body LED 109SG495 may be provided, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot game state may be varied depending on the illumination mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 is illuminated while the movable body operation suggestion performance is being executed.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, an example is given of a form in which multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body operation suggestion performance A, but this invention is not limited to this, and multiple display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as movable body operation suggestion performance A may be provided, and the proportion of the game state controlled to a jackpot may be varied depending on which mode the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed in as movable body operation suggestion performance A.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-25, a form in which the first movable body 109SG401 does not move back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position (movable body movement suggestion effect) during the third expanded display period is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and a case in which the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the third expanded display period may also be provided. In particular, by making it possible to execute the reciprocating movement of the first movable body 109SG401 between the retreat position and the suggested position during the third expanded display period in some cases in which the variable display result is a jackpot, the player can be drawn to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 moves back and forth between the retreat position and the suggested position during the third expanded display period, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 109SG, a form is exemplified in which the execution of movable body operation performance A or movable body operation performance B is suggested by moving multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body operation suggestion performance A) or by repeatedly moving the first movable body 109SG401 between a retreat position and a suggested position (movable body operation suggestion performance B), but this invention is not limited to this, and the execution of movable body operation performance A or movable body operation performance B may be suggested in a manner other than the display of these specific images or the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, if the first movable body 109SG401 is equipped with an LED (movable body LED 109SG495) as shown in the characteristic part 109SG, the execution of movable body operation performance A or movable body operation performance B may be suggested by the lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED.

In addition, in the characteristic part 109SG, as shown in Fig. 13-28 and Fig. 13-30, a form is exemplified in which, as movable body action suggestion performance A, multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed with the contrast of the images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B reduced on the image display device 5 (see Fig. 13-28 (D) and Fig. 13-30 (D)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as movable body action suggestion performance A, the display of multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started from a timing (for example, the timing of Fig. 13-28 (C) or Fig. 13-30 (C)) before the contrast of the images of ally character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is reduced on the image display device 5.

In this way, when the display of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started at a timing before the contrast of the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B is reduced on the image display device 5, the transparency (transparency) of the multiple star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be increased so that the effect images being displayed on the image display device 5 (the images of friendly character A and enemy character A or enemy character B in the examples of Figures 13-28 and 13-30) are easier to see than when the contrast is reduced.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 109SG, as shown in FIG. 13-29(G) and the like, an explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 when a movable body movement performance is being performed, and part of the performance image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes invisible due to the explosion effect image 109SG005B. However, the invention is not limited to this, and when a movable body movement performance is being performed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body movement performance may be displayed over the entire display area of the image display device 5, and all other performance images may become invisible.

In addition, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example was given of a form in which a movable body action presentation is executed during the reach presentation of a super reach, but this invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body action presentation may be a timing other than during the reach presentation of a super reach. For example, as a modified example 109SG-8, as shown in Figures 13-36(A), 13-36(B), and 13-37(C) to 13-37(H), it may be possible to execute the movable body action presentation during the period from when the combination of decorative patterns becomes reach to the start timing of the reach presentation of a super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 13-36(B), the movable body operation suggestion effect is started after the reach is reached, and the image display device 5 displays an image of the character with eyes closed as a branching effect to notify whether the reach effect to be executed thereafter will branch into a reach effect with high expectation (high probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state) (for example, the reach effects of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 described in the characteristic section 109SG) or a reach effect with low expectation (low probability of being controlled into a jackpot game state) (for example, a reach effect with lower expectation than the reach effects of Super Reach α1, Super Reach α2, Super Reach β1, and Super Reach β2 described in the characteristic section 109SG). As the branching effect, the image of the character with eyes closed is displayed, and the character is gradually enlarged during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 13-37(C).

When the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expectation reach performance, the display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character displayed on the image display device 5 opening its eyes, as shown in Figures 13-37(C) to 13-37(E). In other words, in the branching performance, the character displayed on the image display device 5 darkens without opening its eyes, thereby announcing that a high-expectation reach performance will not be executed (a low-expectation reach performance will be executed). After the display area of the image display device 5 has completely darkened (after the branching performance has ended), a low-expectation reach performance is executed.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display that executes a high-expectation reach performance, as shown in Figures 13-37 (F) to 13-37 (H), the character displayed on the image display device 5 opens its eyes to notify the player that a high-expectation reach performance will be executed. At this time, a movable body action performance is also executed. Then, after the movable body action performance and the branching performance have ended, a high-expectation reach performance is executed.

In other words, the movable body operation presentation may be executed as a presentation to notify that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state, as exemplified in the characteristic section 109SG, but it may also be executed as a presentation to notify that a high-expectation reach presentation will be executed (a presentation to notify that there is a high expectation that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In addition, in this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in Figures 13-36 (B) and 13-37 (C), an example is shown in which a character with his eyes closed is gradually enlarged as a branching effect on the image display device 5, but the invention is not limited to this. When a character with his eyes closed is gradually enlarged as a branching effect, an effect image such as a convergent line may be displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character, so that the player can focus on whether the character will open his eyes or not.

As described above, in the characteristic section 109SG, an example was given of an embodiment in which this invention is applied as a branch as to whether or not the variable display result is a jackpot during the reach performance of a super reach, but as shown in this modified example 109SG-8, this invention may also be applied as a branch as to whether a reach performance with low expectation or a reach performance with high expectation is executed. In this case, the specific image in this invention corresponds to an image of a character (the first specific image is an image of a character with their eyes closed, and the second specific image is an image of a character with their eyes open), and the effect image in this invention corresponds to an image such as the converging lines described above.

As shown in Figures 13-36 and 13-37, in this modified example 109SG-8, when the movable body action presentation is executed as a presentation to notify that a high expectation reach presentation will be executed, a form is exemplified in which a movable body action suggestion presentation is executed before the execution of the movable body action presentation, but this invention is not limited to this, and the movable body action suggestion presentation does not have to be executed. Also, the execution rate of the movable body action presentation after that may be different depending on whether or not the movable body action suggestion presentation is executed (the rate at which a high expectation reach presentation is executed may be different). (Explanation of feature portion 162SG)
Next, the characteristic part 162SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the characteristic part 162SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG has the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic configuration described above, and the description of the same configuration that is given the same reference numeral as the basic configuration will be omitted here, and the characteristic configuration of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG that is different from the pachinko game machine 1 of the basic configuration will be described below.

Figure 14-1 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a pachinko game machine 162SG001 with a characteristic part 162SG. As shown in the block diagram of Figure 14-1, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 with a characteristic part 162SG, a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, and a normal symbol display device 20 are installed in the lower left position of the game area, which is a predetermined position of the game board 2, and a high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is installed so as to be visible to the player, and is used to notify by lighting that a variable display time extension adjustment or a jackpot period extension adjustment, which will be described later, is being performed to adjust the number of game balls paid out (given to the player) in a unit period due to a high ball output state being determined.

These high ball output state notification LEDs 162SG071 are connected to the main board 11, just like the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, and the normal pattern display device 20, and are controlled to be turned on and off by the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) executing the ball output state determination process (see Figure 14-13) described below, and the control period for turning these on and off is the same as the control period for the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, and the normal pattern display device 20.

In this way, in the pachinko game machine 162SG001 of the characteristic part 162SG, the lighting of the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 indicates that the machine is in a high ball output state, and it is possible to confirm (understand) that the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are being performed.

Figure 14-2 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature unit 162SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 14-2 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-2(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set according to the instructions by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change of the decorative pattern in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the current game state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 96XXH is a ball-out state designation command that designates the judgment status of the ball-out state judgment in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. In the ball-out state designation command, different EXT data is set according to the judgment status of the ball-out state judgment, as shown in FIG. 14-2 (C). As a specific example, command 9600H is a ball-out state 1 designation command corresponding to a low ball-out state that is not judged to be a high ball-out state, command 9601H is a ball-out state 2 designation command corresponding to a judgment state that is judged to be a first high ball-out state in which the number of consecutive jackpot wins is equal to or greater than the first judgment number (5 times) and less than the second judgment number (10 times), and command 9602H is a ball-out state 3 designation command corresponding to a judgment state that is judged to be a second high ball-out state in which the number of consecutive jackpot wins is equal to or greater than the second judgment number (10 times).

Command 97XXH is a command to notify the number of consecutive wins after a high ball output state has been determined, which is the number of jackpots that have occurred in the determined high ball output state. EXT data corresponding to the number of consecutive wins after a high ball output state is set, and the number of consecutive wins after a high ball output state is specified on the performance control board 12 side by the EXT data.

Command 98XXH is a command that notifies the number of remaining variable displays after the determination, which is the number of variable displays executed after the high ball output state has been determined (including the number of variable displays after the high base state has ended). EXT data corresponding to the number of remaining variable displays after the determination is set, and the number of remaining variable displays after the determination is identified on the performance control board 12 side by the EXT data.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a pattern specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not, the judgment result of the type of jackpot (probable win, non-probable win, or sudden probability), and whether it will be a small win, as the judgment result at the time of winning. Command C6XXH is a variation category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the variation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other".

The commands shown in FIG. 14-2(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game balls having entered each winning slot to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 14-3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random number values counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 14-3, in this feature section 162SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 shown in FIG. 14-9.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 14-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this characteristic section 162SG, a display result determination table common to the first special chart and the second special chart is used as the display result determination table, but the invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the display result determination table 1 in this feature section 162SG, a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result judgment table 1 in this feature unit 162SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 162SG001, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature unit 162SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature unit 162SG). That is, in the display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 162SG001 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when the gaming state is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

In addition, FIG. 14-4(B) shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The display result determination table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In the display result determination table 2 in this feature section 162SG, regardless of whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "small win".

In the display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result is the determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the display result determination table 2 in this feature section 162SG, the number of determination values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a determination value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no determination value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 14-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature unit 162SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 162SG will be explained using FIG. 14-5(B). In this feature section 162SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game of "Probable jackpot C", a round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this feature section 162SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this feature section 162SG). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this feature section 162SG, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 14-6), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature section 162SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

Note that a jackpot that occurs in a low base state may be described as a first jackpot (first hit), and a jackpot that occurs in a time-saving state (high-probability high base state and low-probability high base state) may be described as a consecutive jackpot (consecutive hit). The period of the jackpot state and high base state from when the first jackpot (first hit) occurs until it is controlled to the normal state is also called the consecutive hit period (advantageous period). Note that in this feature section 162SG, even if a special jackpot C occurs, it is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot, so the special jackpot C is not considered to be the first jackpot (first hit), and if a jackpot occurs in the special jackpot state after the special jackpot C, the jackpot is considered to be the first jackpot (first hit), but this invention is not limited to this, and these special jackpots C may be considered to be first jackpots (first hits), and the period of the high-probability low base state after the special jackpot C may also be included in the consecutive hit period (advantageous period).

In addition, although this feature is not implemented in feature unit 162SG, instead of the sure-variable jackpot C, a sudden time-saving jackpot may be provided in which the game state after the jackpot becomes a low-probability high-base state, and in this case, the sudden time-saving jackpot becomes the first jackpot (initial hit).

Furthermore, for example, when a time-saving pattern (such as a 137 stopping pattern or a stopping pattern exclusive to time-saving that is not displayed in the variable display) is derived and displayed as a stopping pattern, the high base state may be controlled without executing a round of play that opens the special variable winning ball device 7, and when the game is controlled directly from the normal state to the high base state in this way, the start of the high base state marks the start of the consecutive win period (advantageous period).

In other words, the winning streak period (advantageous period) is the period from when the normal state is controlled to either the jackpot state (advantageous state) or the high base state (special state) until it is subsequently controlled to the normal state.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 14-6 shows the variation patterns in this feature section 162SG. In this feature section 162SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 162SG has only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, .... Also, multiple super reach fluctuation patterns may be provided for the super reach fluctuation pattern, such as super reach α, super reach β, ....

The variation patterns in this feature section 162SG also include a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in Figure 14-6, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach is executed in this feature section 162SG is set shorter than that of the super reach fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this characteristic section 162SG, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but this invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 14-7 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature section 162SG. In this feature section 162SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-7, if the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, if the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (the normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-2 (the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A.

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1 and PB1-2 is different between the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 498 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, and 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, and 747 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2. In other words, in this feature part 162SG, when the variable display result is a sure-change jackpot A or a sure-change jackpot B, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PB1-2, which is a super reach fluctuation pattern, at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-sure-change jackpot, so that it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, a special win variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special win variation pattern) using the special win variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this feature section 162SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed big win C or a small win.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach miss fluctuation pattern).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-2 (super reach miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 162SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being three or four, or on the time-saving state, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the ball output state will be explained using Figure 14-8. The ball output state flag in Figure 14-8 is a flag that is updated by the ball output state determination process shown in Figure 14-13 described later, and is set to "0" when the ball output state is low, set to "1" when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, and set to "2" when the ball output state is the second high ball output state. Depending on the value of the ball output state flag, it is possible to identify whether the ball output state at that time is the low ball output state, the first high ball output state, or the second high ball output state.

The variable display time of each fluctuation pattern corresponding to the low ball output state where the ball output state flag is set to "0" is the same as the variable display time of each fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 14-6, and the variable display time corresponding to the ball output state flag set to "0" is not extended, but the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is set to "1" is extended by setting the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) which occurs frequently to a variable display time longer than the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4) which corresponds to the ball output state flag set to "0", and when the ball output state flag is set to "1", the variable display of the non-reach miss of these extended variable display times is executed, thereby lengthening the average variable display time.

In addition, the variable display time of the variable pattern corresponding to the second high ball output state, in which the ball output state flag is set to "2", is extended by setting a variable display time that is even longer than the variable display time of the variable pattern of the non-reach miss (PA1-1 to PA1-4), normal reach miss (PA2-1), and normal reach jackpot, which corresponds to the ball output state flag "1". When the ball output state flag is set to "2", the variable display of the non-reach miss, normal reach miss, and normal reach jackpot of these extended variable display times is executed, so that the average variable display time becomes even longer.

These extended variable display times are as follows: for non-reach PA1-1, which is a non-reduced fluctuation pattern, it is 1 second in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", and 1.5 seconds in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". For non-reach PA1-2 to non-reach PA1-4, which are shortened fluctuation patterns, it is 0.5 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", and 1.0 seconds in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2". For PA2-1 and PB1-1, which are reach fluctuation patterns, it is 0 seconds in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", and 5 seconds in the second high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "2".

Note that the length of the extended variable display time shown in FIG. 14-8 is merely an example, and the extension may be different from these lengths. For example, in the second high ball output state, the extension may be longer than in the first high ball output state.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-8, the average variable display time can be efficiently lengthened by extending the non-reach missed fluctuation pattern, which has a high execution frequency due to its high decision ratio, and the normal reach fluctuation pattern, which has a higher execution frequency than the super reach. In addition, for the reach and super reach fluctuation patterns, which have a large amount of data related to the performance due to their long variable display time, an embodiment is shown in which an increase in data volume caused by storing multiple data by extending the variable display time can be prevented. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for all fluctuation patterns, a predetermined extension time of "1 second" can be uniformly added to the variable display time to extend it, and during this extended period, a common performance using common performance data can be executed for each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-8, in the first high ball output state where the ball output state flag is "1", only the non-reach miss fluctuation pattern is extended, and when the ball output state flag is "2", the reach fluctuation pattern is also extended, so that the average variable display time can be extended more efficiently by increasing the number of fluctuation patterns to be extended in the second high ball output state, but this invention is not limited to this. For example, even when the ball output state flag is "2", only the fluctuation patterns extended when the ball output state flag is "1" may be further extended, so that the fluctuation patterns to be extended do not change depending on the ball output state, thereby preventing the control load related to the extension from increasing excessively.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-8, not only the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state) in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive winning period, but also the variable display in the normal state when the consecutive winning period (advantageous period) ends so as to be able to respond to the case where a jackpot occurs again with a small number of variable display times after the consecutive winning period (advantageous period) ends and the game is controlled to the normal state, as described below, an example is shown in which the fluctuation patterns of non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach PA1-3 corresponding to the normal state are extended, but the invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to extend only the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 corresponding to the time-saving state (high base state) in which the variable display is executed during the consecutive winning period.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 162SG is provided with a game control data holding area 162SG150 as shown in FIG. 14-9, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. The game control data holding area 162SG150 shown in FIG. 14-9 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 162SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 162SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 162SG151C, a game control flag setting section 162SG152, a game control timer setting section 162SG153, a game control counter setting section 162SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 162SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 162SG151A stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 162SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 162SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 162SG151B associates the reservation number with the winning order (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), as reservation data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 162SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 162SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the passage of the game ball as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of multiple types of flags, including the ball output state flag described above.

The game control timer setting unit 162SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control timer setting unit 162SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 162SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 162SG001. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 14-1 is provided with a performance control data holding area 162SG190 as shown in Figure 14-10 (A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 162SG190 shown in Figure 14-10 (A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 162SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 162SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 162SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 162SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 162SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 162SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 162SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 162SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 162SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 162SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 162SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 162SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 162SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 162SG194A as shown in FIG. 14-10 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 162SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 162SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 162SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation commands, pattern designation commands, variable category designation commands, and reserved memory number notification commands separately as the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A of this feature section 162SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a display pending flag indicating whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Figure 9) is pending, in other words, indicating that the display pattern is pending because a start opening winning designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and pending memory number notification command have been newly stored due to the occurrence of a new start winning, and a pending display flag in which a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the pending memory display is set, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart pending memory and the second special chart pending memory.

In addition, in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A of this feature unit 162SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that a performance restriction flag can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the second special symbol reserved memory. Note that the performance restriction flag is a flag that indicates that the entry is not subject to the pre-reading preview performance when a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port in the command analysis process (Figure 14-22) but the pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are not received within the first reserved memory number notification waiting time or the second reserved memory number notification waiting time described below.

In addition, in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, if it is not decided to execute the pre-reading notice performance, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. If it is decided to execute the pre-reading notice performance, the hold display flag is set to "1" (square (◇)) or "2" (star (☆)), which corresponds to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode (e.g., a square (◇) or a star (☆)), and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display predicts the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a first winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 162SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning, and when a second winning entry is made to the second winning entry, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the command buffer 162SG194A for receiving the command at the time of winning. When a winning entry is made to the first winning entry, the command from the starting entry designation command to the reserved memory number notification command is sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the command from the starting entry designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first or second special symbol reserved memory in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 162SG194A shown in FIG. 14-10(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that was just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 14-10(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the game control main processing of this characteristic part 162SG will be described based on FIG. 14-11. As shown in FIG. 14-11, the game control main processing of this characteristic part 162SG executes almost the same processing as the game control main processing in the basic configuration of FIG. 4, but the characteristics of the game control main processing of this characteristic part 162SG are that the content of the recovery processing of S4 is different, and in addition to the initialization processing of step S6a, processing of step S6b related to the initial setting of the ball output status flag is added.

In the recovery process of step S4 of the game control main process of this feature unit 162SG, a process is executed to restore the ball output status flag to the state before the power failure. As will be described later, in the power failure process of step S19 in the game control timer interrupt process of this feature unit 162SG shown in FIG. 14-12, the backup data stored when the power failure occurs includes the flag value data of the ball output status flag at the time of the power failure.

Specific recovery conditions for the ball output state flag are as follows: when the value of the ball output state flag is "0" corresponding to a low ball output state when the power outage occurs, the recovery process sets the ball output state flag to "0", when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" corresponding to the first ball output state when the power outage occurs, the recovery process sets the ball output state flag to "1", and when the value of the ball output state flag is "2" corresponding to the second ball output state when the power outage occurs, the recovery process sets the ball output state flag to "2". In other words, the recovery process of S4 sets the value of the ball output state flag to the value before the power outage occurs, restoring the ball output state before the power outage.

The backup data mentioned above also includes data on the number of consecutive wins after the judgment and the number of remaining variable display times after the judgment, which will be described later. This data on the number of consecutive wins after the judgment and the number of remaining variable display times after the judgment are also restored to the data at the time of the power outage by the recovery process of S4.

In this way, the recovery process in step S4 restores the value of the ball output state flag to the value before the power outage occurred, and the data for the number of consecutive wins after the judgment and the number of variable display remaining times after the judgment are restored. Therefore, even if a power outage occurs in the first ball output state or the second ball output state in which the ball output speed adjustment is being implemented, the adjustment of the ball output speed is not terminated by the power outage, but continues even after the power outage is restored.

On the other hand, if the recovery conditions are not met in step S3, the initialization process of step S6a is executed and the initial settings (including the initialization of various game data such as the number of consecutive wins) are performed when the power is turned on, etc., and then the ball output status flag is set to "0", which is the initial value when the power is turned on, corresponding to a low ball output state. In this way, when the power is turned on when the power outage recovery conditions are not met (when the power supply starts other than when power is restored), the ball output status flag is set to "0", which is the value corresponding to a low ball output state, thereby preventing the ball output speed from being adjusted inappropriately when the power is turned on.

Next, the game control timer interrupt processing of this characteristic part 162SG will be described based on FIG. 14-12. The game control timer interrupt processing of this characteristic part 162SG executes the processes of steps S21 to S27, just like the game control timer interrupt processing of FIG. 5 in the basic configuration, but in addition to these processes, it differs in that it includes the power cut processing of step S19, which was omitted in the basic configuration, and the ball output state determination processing, which is a characteristic feature of the game control timer interrupt processing of this characteristic part 162SG.

In the power cut process of step S19, it is detected whether a power cut signal has been output from the power supply board 17 (whether the power supply board has been turned on). The power cut signal is a signal that is output when, for example, a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board 17 detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply being supplied. When it is detected that a power cut signal has been output, as described above, each game data including the aforementioned ball output state flags and the like that are necessary to restore the state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 to the state at the time of power cut is saved as backup data in RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. Note that if it is not detected that a power cut signal has been output, the power cut process is terminated. Then, after executing the ball output state determination process of step S20, each process of steps S21 to S27 is executed.

Here, the ball output state determination process of step S20 of this characteristic section 162SG will be explained using FIG. 14-13(a). FIG. 14-13(a) is a flow diagram showing an example of the processing contents of the ball output state determination process of step S20.

In the ball output state determination process, the game control microcomputer 100 first determines whether the value of the ball output state flag is "0", that is, whether the ball output state is a low ball output state, a first high ball output state, or a second high ball output state (step 162SGS01).

If the value of the ball output status flag is "0" (step 162SGS01; Y), it is determined whether the consecutive win count stored in the game control data holding area 162SG150 of RAM 102 is equal to or greater than the first determination count of "5" (step 162SGS02). If it is not equal to or greater than the first determination count of "5," that is, if the consecutive win state is not in effect or if the consecutive win state is in effect but the number of consecutive wins is less than five (step 162SGS02; N), the ball output status determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the consecutive win count is equal to or greater than the first determination count of "5" (step 162SGS02; Y), it is further determined whether the consecutive win count is equal to or greater than the second determination count of "10" (step 162SGS03).

If the number of consecutive wins is not the second judgment number of "10" or more (step 162SGS03; N), that is, when the number of consecutive wins reaches the first judgment number of "5", it is judged that the first ball output state has been reached and the ball output state flag is set to "1" corresponding to the first ball output state (step 162SGS06), and the first stage of adjustment is started as shown in FIG. 14-13 (b) (step 162SGS07). Note that the number of consecutive wins is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, so the 5th consecutive win is a jackpot for which the first stage of jackpot period extension adjustment is not performed, and the first stage of jackpot period extension adjustment is performed for the 6th to 10th consecutive wins.

As shown in FIG. 14-21, the fanfare presentation period at the start of the jackpot state, during which the special variable winning ball device 7 constituting the large winning port is not open, the interval period from the end of a round of play to the start of the next round of play, and the ending presentation period at the end of the jackpot state are extended more than in the low ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "0". This extends the period of the jackpot game in which the same number of game balls are paid out, thereby reducing the number of game balls paid out per unit time.

The extension lengths of the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period are set longer in the second high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "2" than in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1", as shown in FIG. 14-21. The jackpot period extension adjustment in the first high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "1" is a first-stage jackpot period extension adjustment with a relatively short extension length, and the jackpot period extension adjustment in the second high ball output state in which the ball output state flag is set to "2" is a second-stage jackpot period extension adjustment with a relatively long extension length.

Then, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 starts to light up to notify the player that the high ball output state has been reached (step 162SGS08), and the post-determination variable display remaining number (100) is set to specify the remaining number of times until the variable display number since the high ball output state was determined reaches the predetermined number of 100 times. The post-determination consecutive win count, which is the number of consecutive jackpots that have occurred since the high ball output state was determined, is set to the initial value "0" (step 162SGS09), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS17. Note that, in this feature section 162SG, an example is shown in which the predetermined number is 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these numbers may be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications of the jackpot probability, jackpot continuation rate, etc.

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive wins is equal to or greater than the second judgment number of "10" (step 162SGS03; Y), that is, when the number of consecutive wins reaches the second judgment number of "10", it is judged that the second ball output state has been reached, and the ball output state flag is set to "2" corresponding to the second ball output state (step 162SGS04), and after starting the second stage of adjustment as shown in FIG. 14-13 (b) (step 162SGS05), it proceeds to step 162SGS17. Note that the number of consecutive wins is updated in the jackpot end process as described later, so the second stage of jackpot period extension adjustment is performed for jackpots from the 11th consecutive win onwards.

If the value of the ball output status flag is not "0" (step 162SGS01; N), it is determined whether the number of consecutive wins after the determination is equal to or greater than 10, which is the end determination number for ending the adjustment, that is, whether the number of consecutive wins after the determination has reached 10, which is the end determination number (step 162SGS10). Note that, although this feature section 162SG illustrates an example in which the end determination number is 10, the invention is not limited to this, and these numbers may be changed as appropriate depending on the specifications such as the jackpot probability and jackpot continuation rate.

If the number of consecutive wins after the determination is 10 or more, which is the end determination number (step 162SGS10; N), in other words, if the number of consecutive wins that have occurred without ending the consecutive win state after the number of consecutive wins has reached 5 or more and it has been determined that the state is in a high ball output state, it is determined whether the game state is in a low base state, that is, whether the consecutive win state has ended (step 162SGS11), and if the game state is in a low base state (step 162SGS11; Y), proceed to step 162SGS13. Note that the number of consecutive wins is reset when the consecutive win state ends and the state becomes a low base state.

On the other hand, if the number of consecutive wins after the judgment is not 10 or more, which is the number of times for the end judgment (step 162SGS10; N), or if the number of consecutive wins after the judgment is 10 or more, which is the number for the end judgment (step 162SGS10; Y) but the game state is not in a low base state (step 162SGS11; N), it is further determined whether the number of remaining variable display times after the judgment set in step 162SGS09 is "0" (step 162SGS12).

If the number of remaining variable displays after the determination is not "0" (step 162SGS12;N), that is, if the predetermined number of 100 variable displays have not been executed since the number of consecutive wins was 5 or more and the high ball output state was determined, the ball output state determination process is terminated.

If the number of remaining variable displays after the determination is "0" (step 162SGS12; Y), that is, if the predetermined number of 100 variable displays have been performed since the high ball output state was determined, proceed to step 162SGS13.

In step 162SGS13, the ball output state flag is updated to "0" to complete the first or second stage adjustment described above (step 162SGS14), the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is turned off to notify the user that adjustment is being performed in a high ball output state (step 162SGS15), the variable display remaining number of times after judgment and the consecutive number of times after judgment are reset (step 162SGS16), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS17.

In step 162SGS17, the ball output state designation command corresponding to the value of the ball output state flag set in any one of steps 162SGS04, 162SGS06, and 162SGS13 is sent, and then the ball output state determination process is terminated. The ball output state designation command sent and set in this manner is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

As described above, by executing the ball output state determination process shown in Figure 14-13 (a), as shown in Figure 14-13 (b), if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the same as when power was first supplied, neither the variable display time extension adjustment in which the variable display time is extended nor the jackpot period extension adjustment in which the jackpot play period is extended is executed, but if the ball output state determination process determines that the first high ball output state is reached and the value of the ball output state flag is updated to "1", both the first stage variable display time extension adjustment in which the variable display time is extended to the length of the first stage and the first stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the period of jackpot play is extended to the length of the first stage are executed. Furthermore, if the ball output state flag value is updated to "2" by determining that the ball output state is the second high ball output state in the ball output state determination process, a second stage variable display time extension adjustment in which the variable display time is extended to a second stage length longer than the first stage, and a second stage jackpot period extension adjustment in which the jackpot play period is extended to a second stage length longer than the first stage are both performed, and the fact that these adjustments are being performed is notified by the lighting of the high ball output state notification LED162SG071.

Furthermore, if the number of consecutive wins after the judgment reaches the end judgment number when the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", or if the number of remaining variable displays after the judgment becomes 0 (if 100 variable displays have been executed since the value of the ball output status flag was set to "1" or "2"), the value of the ball output status flag will be updated to "0" and the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment will end.

In addition, this characteristic section 162SG illustrates an example of a form in which the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1", but this invention is not limited to this, and the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 may not be turned on from the timing when the value of the ball output state flag is updated from "0" to "1" during normal play, but may be turned on only for a certain period of time from the time when power is restored if a power outage occurs while the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2".

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment are executed, but this invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball output status flag is "1" or "2", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed. Furthermore, when the value of the ball output status flag is "1", only one of the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed, and when the value of the ball output status flag is "2", both the variable display time extension adjustment and the jackpot period extension adjustment may be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-13(a), the CPU 103 sends a ball-out state designation command to the performance control board 12 only when the value of the ball-out state flag changes, but the invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 may send a ball-out state designation command to the performance control board 12 every time the ball-out state determination process is executed or every time a variable display is executed. Furthermore, in the characteristic section 162SG, a form in which a ball-out state designation command is provided as part of the performance control command is exemplified, but the invention is not limited to this, and instead of these ball-out state designation commands, game state designation commands corresponding to each ball-out state (low ball-out state, first high ball-out state, second high ball-out state) may be provided.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature unit 162SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIG. 14-14. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start opening switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the on state based on a detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A (step 162SGS101). At this time, if the first start opening switch 22A is in the on state (step 162SGS101; Y), it judges whether the first special chart reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special chart game using the first special chart, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 162SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special chart reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. If the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; N), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "1" (step 162SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 162SGS101 (step 162SGS101; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 162SGS102 (step 162SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B, which is provided corresponding to the second start hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, is judged to be on or not (step 162SGS104). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 162SGS104; Y), it is judged whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 162SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special symbols by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 162SGS105 (step 162SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 is set to "2" (step 162SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 162SGS103 or step 162SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 162SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 162SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 162SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 (step 162SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 162SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 162SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 162SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 162SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step 162SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 162SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 162SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special pattern process process is completed.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 162SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS115), and then the processing of step 162SGS104 is proceeded to. In contrast, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 162SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 162SGS116), and then the start winning processing is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 14-15 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 162SGS112 in Figure 14-14 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 162SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S110 in Figure 6, Figure 14-16) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S111 in Figure 6, Figure 14-17) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 162SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 etc. will execute a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in Figure 14-15 (A), the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 162SG001 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 (step 162SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 162SGS121, the display result judgment table 1 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 162SGS109 of FIG. 14-14 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 162SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 162SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the result is not within the big win determination range, i.e., if it is determined that the variable display will not result in a big win (step 162SGS123; N), the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set (step 162SGS124). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result extracted in step 162SGS109 in FIG. 14-14 is within a predetermined small win determination range (step 162SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if it is judged that a small win will occur in the variable display (step 162SGS125; Y), the transmission setting of the sixth pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "small win", is executed (step 162SGS126), a variable pattern judgment table for special wins is selected and set (step 162SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS138.

If the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 is not within the predetermined small win judgment range, that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being "miss" is executed (step 162SGS128), and it is judged whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 162SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 162SGS129; N), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 162SGS129; Y), the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set (step 162SGS131). The miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A is a miss fluctuation pattern judgment table used when the number of reserved memories is 2 or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table that is used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

In addition to these miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A and D, this feature unit 162SG also has miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, which is used when the number of reserved memories is three, and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, which is used when the number of reserved memories is four. As shown in FIG. 14-7, among the miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern, and in the miss fluctuation pattern determination tables B and C, values exceeding 0 to A within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 small determination values from 901 to 997 within the range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern.

For this reason, in step 162SGS126, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, and the determination of non-reach and super reach will always result in a non-reach or super reach fluctuation pattern even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination, so the determination at the time of the initial winning is made using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

Also, if it is determined in step 162SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 162SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 162SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

The controller 100 also executes the setting to send the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, i.e., the second symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command if it is a sure-variable jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command if it is a non-variable jackpot (step 162SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a). If the determined jackpot type is a non-sure-variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; Y), the controller 100 selects and sets the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A as a table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 162SGS135), and proceeds to step 162SGS138.

In addition, if the determined jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 162SGS134a; N), it is further determined whether the determined jackpot type is a variable jackpot A or a variable jackpot B (step 162SGS134b).

If the determined jackpot type is a sure jackpot A or a sure jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; Y), select and set jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B as the table for determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern (step 162SGS136), and proceed to step 162SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is not a sure jackpot A or a sure jackpot B (step 162SGS134b; N), in other words, if the determined jackpot type is a sure jackpot C, select and set the special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table (step 162SGS137) and proceed to step 162SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS127, step 162SGS130, step 162SGS131, step 162SGS135, step 162SGS136, and step 162SGS137, the variable category according to the range of judgment values including the random number MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for the variable pattern judgment (step 162SGS138). In this characteristic part 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-15 (B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the determination made by the processing of step 162SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 162SGS132), and the winning random number determination process is terminated.

Figure 14-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 14-16, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 162SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 162SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151B corresponding to the reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 162SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 162SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151B is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151B (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") is shifted up by one entry at a time (step 162SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 162SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 162SGS141 (step 162SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 162SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 162SGS145, the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154 may be read and it may be determined whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 162SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 162SGS141 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

In addition, the special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and for example, the special chart game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the number of reserved first special charts is other than "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151A corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 162SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for fluctuation.

Following the processing of step 162SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151A is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory unit 162SG151A (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to the higher level by one entry at a time (step 162SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 162SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS149.

In step 162SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set as the table to be used to determine whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 162SGS150a). In addition, in this step 162SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the display result judgment table 1 selected in step 162SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 162SGS150a, whether or not to set the special chart display result as a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) as a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 162SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 162SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 (step 162SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-5 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 162SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, it is determined which of the multiple types of jackpot types the jackpot type should be, depending on whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 162SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 162SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 (step 162SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it is set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it is set to "3".

On the other hand, if it is determined in step 162SGS150a that the result is not a "big win" (step 162SGS150a; N), the process proceeds to S150b, where the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 14-4 is selected and set. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special chart display result of "small win" to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c). In step 162SGS150c, if the variable special chart is the first special chart, the determination value corresponding to the first special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win", and if the variable special chart is the second special chart, the determination value corresponding to the second special chart is used to determine whether the special chart display result is a "small win".

If it is determined in step 162SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c; Y), the small win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 is set to the ON state (step 162SGS151).

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step 162SGS150c that the special chart display result is a "small win" (step 162SGS150c; N), proceed to step 162SGS156.

In step 162SGS156, the fixed special symbol is set according to the pre-determined result of whether to control to a big win game state (whether the big win flag is on or not), whether to control to a small win game state (whether the small win flag is on or not), and further according to the determined result of the big win type in the case of a big win game state. As an example, in response to the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being "miss", a special symbol showing the symbol "-", which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be "big win" in step 162SGS150a, if the big win type in step 162SGS154 is "big win A", a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the big win type is "big win B", a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "non-variable jackpot", a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "variable jackpot C", a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, in response to a pre-determined result that the special symbol display result is a "small jackpot", a special symbol showing the symbol "2", which is a small jackpot symbol, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are only examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 162SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 162SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the number of reserved memories for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 162SGS145 (step 162SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 162SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 14-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 14-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS161; Y), the jackpot type is identified from the jackpot type buffer value (step 162SGS162).

Then, it is determined whether the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot C" (step 162SGS163), and if it is not "Probable variable jackpot C", that is, if it is either "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", or "Non-probable variable jackpot" (step 162SGS163; N), jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A or jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the identified jackpot type. Specifically, if the identified jackpot type is "non-probable variable jackpot", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the identified jackpot type is "Probable variable jackpot A" or "Probable variable jackpot B", jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected and set.

On the other hand, if the identified jackpot type is a "Certain jackpot C" (step 162 SGS163; Y), a special jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162 SGS165).

If the determination in step 162SGS161 indicates that the big win flag is not ON (step 162SGS161; N), it is further determined whether or not the small win flag is ON (step 162SGS166). If the small win flag is ON (step 162SGS166; Y), a special win fluctuation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 162SGS167), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS175.

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 162SGS166; N), the game control flag setting unit 162SG152 determines whether the time-saving flag is on to determine whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 162SGS168). If the time-saving flag is on (step 162SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected and set as the table to be used to determine one of multiple types of fluctuation pattern (step 162SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 162SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of the reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit 162SG154, and it is determined whether the reserved memory number of the identified variable special chart is 1 or 2 (step 162SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 162 SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 162 SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 162 SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 162 SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 162 SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 162SGS172; N), the program selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining the variable pattern as one of multiple types (step 162SGS174), and proceeds to step 162SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 162SGS164, step 162SGS165, step 162SGS167, step 162SGS169, step 162SGS171, step 162SGS173, and step 162SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special hit fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 162SGS175). In this case, even if the variation pattern is the same, if the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "1", a variation pattern of the variable display time that has been extended and adjusted by a first stage corresponding to the first high ball output state will be determined, and if the value of the ball output state flag at that time is "2", a variation pattern of the variable display time that has been extended and adjusted by a second stage corresponding to the second high ball output state will be determined.

In other words, in step 162SGS175, the variation pattern of the variable display time is determined according to the value of the ball output status flag.

When the jackpot flag is off, step 162SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 162SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a reach state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 162SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special pattern so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 162SGS176). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 162SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special symbol starts to change (step 162SGS177). For example, when the special symbol change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first change start command, the change pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 162SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the processing of step 162SGS177, for the variation pattern determined in step 162SGS175, a special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern corresponding to the value of the ball output status flag, is set (step 162SGS178). The special pattern variable display time, which is the variable display time of the special pattern, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special pattern in the special pattern game to the fixed special pattern, which is the variable display result (special pattern display result), being displayed stationary. Thereafter, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special pattern variation processing (step 162SGS179), and the variation pattern setting processing is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 162SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 14-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S113 to end the change of the special symbol, and performs control to stop and display the stopped symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B (step 162SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is terminated, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is terminated. In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 162SGS181). Then, it is determined whether the big win flag is turned on (step 162SGS182), and if the big win flag is turned off (step 162SGS182; N), it is further determined whether the small win flag is turned on (step 162SGS183).

If the small win flag is in the ON state, the performance control board 12 is set to send a win start 5 designation command corresponding to a small win (step 162SGS190a). Then, a value corresponding to the small win display time is set in the small win display time timer (step 162SGS190b). Also, the large prize opening count counter is set to the number of times it has been opened (for example, 2 times) (step 162SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 162SGS190d), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is in the ON state (step 162 SGS182; Y), if the special probability flag or the time-saving flag is in the ON state, the CPU 103 clears the special probability flag and the time-saving flag to turn them OFF (step 162 SGS184), and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (special probability jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (special probability jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (special probability jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-special probability jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 162 SGS185).

The CPU 103 then performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 162 SGS 186).

Then, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (for example, the time corresponding to the execution period of the fanfare effect that notifies the occurrence of a jackpot on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot display time timer (step 162SGS187). At this time, the jackpot display time set in the jackpot display time timer is set to the jackpot display time corresponding to the ball output status flag.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", the jackpot display time is set to 30,000 milliseconds, which corresponds to the non-extended fanfare presentation period of 30,000 milliseconds corresponding to a low ball output state.

If the value of the ball output state flag is "1", the jackpot display time is set to 40,000 milliseconds, which corresponds to the 40,000 milliseconds of the first stage extension fanfare presentation period corresponding to the first high ball output state, and if the value of the ball output state flag is "2", the jackpot display time is set to 60,000 milliseconds, which corresponds to the 60,000 milliseconds of the second stage extension fanfare presentation period corresponding to the second high ball output state.

Then, the number of times the large prize opening is performed is set in the large prize opening counter (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) (step 162SGS188), and the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which corresponds to the pre-jackpot opening process (step S114) (step 162SGS189).

On the other hand, if the small win flag is off (step 162SGS183; N), in step 162SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time-saving count counter is "0". In addition, although not specifically illustrated, in this feature section 162SG, if the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game ending process was a high probability jackpot A or a high probability jackpot B, the CPU 103 sets both the high probability flag and the time-saving flag to the on state (controlling the game state to a high probability high base state) and sets the time-saving count counter to "0", and if the jackpot type of the jackpot game ended in the jackpot game ending process was a high probability jackpot C, the CPU 103 sets the high probability flag to the on state (controlling the game state to a high probability low base state) and sets the time-saving count counter to "0". If the type of jackpot in the jackpot game that ended in the jackpot game ending process was a non-variable jackpot, the CPU 103 turns on the time-saving flag and sets the time-saving counter to "100". Otherwise, the process proceeds to step 162SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 162SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving count is remaining and the base state is high, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 162SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 162SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 162SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 162SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 162SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 162SGS194), and then sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state (specifically, low probability low base) corresponding to the state of the probability flag or the time-saving flag (step 162SGS195), and then proceeds to step 162SGS196. Furthermore, when step 162SGS195 is executed, the number of consecutive wins is also reset.

Then, a post-determination variable display remaining number update process is executed (step 162SGS196). In this post-determination variable display remaining number update process, it is determined whether the post-determination variable display remaining number is "0", and if it is not "0" (if there is a remaining number), the remaining number is updated by subtracting 1, and if it is "0", the post-determination variable display remaining number update process is terminated.

Next, in step 162SGS197, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 14-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 162SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 162SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the execution period of the ending presentation that displays the jackpot end on the image display device 5 as the jackpot end display time (step 162SGS202), and the processing ends.

At this time, the jackpot end display time set in the jackpot end display timer is set to the jackpot end display time corresponding to the ball output state flag. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-21, if the ball output state flag value is "0", a timer value corresponding to 60,000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended ending presentation period corresponding to the low ball output state, is set. Also, if the ball output state flag value is "1", a timer value corresponding to 70,000 milliseconds, which is the first-stage extended ending presentation period corresponding to the first high ball output state, is set, and if the ball output state flag value is "2", a timer value corresponding to 90,000 milliseconds, which is the second-stage extended ending presentation period corresponding to the second high ball output state, is set.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 162SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 162SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 162 SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 162 SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; N), it is further determined whether the stored jackpot type is a variable jackpot C (step 162SGS206).

If the stored jackpot type is a special jackpot C (step 162SGS206; Y), the special jackpot flag is set to ON (step 162SGS210), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, if the stored jackpot type is not a sure jackpot C, that is, if the jackpot type is a sure jackpot A or a sure jackpot B (step 162SGS206; N), the sure jackpot flag is turned on (step 162SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 162SGS208), the time-saving count counter is set to "0" (step 162SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 162SGS205; Y), steps 162SGS211 and 162SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS213.

In step 162SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is set to be sent according to the type of jackpot (step 162SGS214). Then, a game status command is set to be sent to notify the performance control board 12 of the game status based on the probability bonus flag and time-saving flag that have been turned on (step 162SGS215).

Then, the process of updating the consecutive win count and the consecutive win count after the determination is executed (step 162SGS216). In this update process, specifically, whether the completed jackpot is the first jackpot that occurred in a low base state as described above or the consecutive win that occurred in a high base state is determined, for example, from the value of the pre-jackpot start state flag corresponding to the state before the completed jackpot occurred ("0" if it is a low base, and "1" if it is a high base). If it is the first jackpot, the consecutive win count is set to "1". On the other hand, in the case of a consecutive jackpot, since the consecutive win count is already a value other than "0", the consecutive win count is updated by adding 1. Also, in the case of a consecutive jackpot, if the initial value is set for the consecutive win count after the determination, the consecutive win count after the determination is updated by adding 1.

Then, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to normal processing of the special pattern (step 162SGS217).

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, although not shown in the figure, if the number of rounds executed in the post-jackpot opening process (step S116) has not reached the set upper limit, the CPU 103 sets an interval period timer according to the value of the ball output state flag. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-21, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0", a timer value corresponding to 5000 milliseconds, which is the non-extended interval period corresponding to the low ball output state, is set. Also, if the value of the ball output state flag is "1", a timer value corresponding to 6000 milliseconds, which is the first-stage extension interval period corresponding to the first high ball output state, is set. Also, if the value of the ball output state flag is "2", a timer value corresponding to 7000 milliseconds, which is the second-stage extension interval period corresponding to the second high ball output state is set.

After setting these timer values to the interval period timer, the CPU 103 subtracts and updates the value of the interval period timer each time it executes post-jackpot opening processing, and controls the opening of the large prize opening based on the time-out of the interval period timer, and updates the value of the special chart process to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening processing, i.e., starts a new round of play.

In this way, in this feature unit 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-20, during the period from when the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed to the end of the jackpot game based on the derived display of the jackpot pattern, the round game continues until a certain open period (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or a certain number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) enter the large prize opening, regardless of the value of the ball output status flag, so the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round game does not change depending on the value of the ball output status flag. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-20 and FIG. 14-21, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during which the game balls cannot enter the large prize opening because the large prize opening is closed, that is, the prize balls cannot be obtained, become longer as the value of the ball output status flag changes from 0 to 1 to 2.

This prevents a decrease in the number of prize balls that a player can obtain because the number of prize balls that can be paid out in each round of play does not change according to the value of the ball output status flag, while at the same time changing (lengthening) the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period, during which game balls cannot enter the large prize slot, according to the value of the ball output status flag, making it possible to reduce the number of prize balls paid out per unit time.

Next, we will explain the processing that the performance control CPU 120 can execute.

Figure 14-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the command analysis process executed in step S75 of Figure 8. In the command analysis process shown in Figure 14-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not there is a received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by checking the memory contents of the performance control command receiving buffer (step 162SGS221).

If there is a received command in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether the received command is a first start port winning designation command (step 162SGS222). If it is a first start port winning designation command (step 162SGS222; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS223). For example, in the processing of step 162SGS223, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the first pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer provided in the performance control timer setting unit 162SG192.

If the received command in step 162SGS222 is not a first start port winning designation command (step 162SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is a second start port winning designation command (step 162SGS224). If it is a second start port winning designation command (step 162SGS224; Y), the second pending memory number notification waiting time is set (step 162SGS225). For example, in the processing of step 162SGS225, a timer initial value that is predetermined corresponding to the waiting time for receiving the second pending memory number notification command may be set in the command reception control timer.

If the received command in step 162SGS224 is not a second start port winning designation command (step 162SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a pattern designation command (step 162SGS226). If the received command in step 162SGS226 is not a pattern designation command (step 162SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 162SGS227). If the received command in step 162SGS227 is not a variable category command (step 162SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending memory number notification command (step 162SGS228). Then, if it is a first pending memory number notification command (step 162SGS228; Y), the first pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (step 162SGS229).

If the received command in step 162SGS228 is not the first pending memory number notification command (step 162SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 162SGS230). If the received command is the second pending memory number notification command (step 162SGS230; Y), the second pending memory number notification waiting time is cleared, for example, by initializing the timing operation of the command reception control timer (step 162SGS231).

After executing either step 162SGS229 or step 162SGS231, the display pending flag of the stored entry is set to "1" indicating that the pending display mode has not been determined (the display pending flag is set to the ON state), and if there is an unreceived command, the performance restriction flag is set to "1" (the display restriction flag is set to the ON state) (step 162SGS232).

If the received command in step 162SGS226 is a pattern designation command (step 162SGS226; Y), if the received command in step 162SGS227 is a variable category command (step 162SGS227; Y), or after executing any of the processes in steps 162SGS223, 162SGS225, and 162SGS232, the received command is stored at the top of the free area in the start winning time received command buffer 162SG194A (not shown) (step 162SGS233), and the process returns to step 162SGS221.

In addition, when a pending memory number notification command (first pending memory number notification command or second pending memory number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), the pending memory number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A. In other words, it is sufficient if the performance control commands received in response to the occurrence of a start winning can be stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A.

If the received command in step 162SGS230 is not the second pending memory count notification command (step 162SGS230; N), settings are made according to the other received command (step 162SGS234) and then processing returns to step 162SGS221. For example, if the received command is a ball output state designation command, the performance control CPU 120 may, in the processing of step 162SGS234, identify the ball output state from the ball output state designation command and execute processing such as turning on a flag corresponding to the identified ball output state. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 is able to identify the ball output state by referring to the flag.

If there is no received command in the command reception buffer in step 162SGS221 (step 162SGS221; N), it is determined whether the first pending memory number notification waiting time or the second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237). If the first pending memory number notification waiting time or the second pending memory number notification waiting time has not elapsed (step 162SGS237; N), the command analysis process is terminated. If the first pending memory number notification waiting time or the second pending memory number notification waiting time has elapsed (step 162SGS237; Y), the display pending flag of the corresponding entry that has not yet been stored is set to "1" as the performance restriction flag (the display pending flag is turned on), and the command analysis process is terminated.

Figure 14-23 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of Figure 9 as the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in Figure 14-23, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start win reception command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS241), and determines whether there is a new command stored at the start win by checking whether there is an entry with the display pending flag in the ON state (step 162SGS242a).

If there is no entry with the display pending flag in the on state (step 162SGS242a; N), proceed to step 162SGS252. If there is an entry with the display pending flag in the on state (step 162SGS242a; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display remaining number after the determination is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit number (step 162SGS242b). If the variable display remaining number after the determination is equal to or less than the look-ahead limit number (step 162SGS242b; Y), proceed to step 162SGS250, where the pending display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below.

If the number of remaining variable display times after the determination is greater than the number of look-ahead limits (step 162SGS242b; N), it is determined whether the performance limit flag for the entry is on (whether "1" is set) (step 162SGS242c). If the performance limit flag is on (step 162SGS242c; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, where the pending display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below.

On the other hand, if the effect restriction flag is off (step 162SGS242b; N), it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the fourth symbol designation command or the sixth symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a guaranteed jackpot C or a small win (step 162SGS243a). If the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a guaranteed jackpot C or a small win (step 162SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 162SGS250, where the reserved display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the normal display mode, as described below. In other words, for reserved memories that result in a guaranteed jackpot C or a small win, the pre-reading preview effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if the symbol designation command is not a symbol designation command indicating a sure jackpot C or a small jackpot, it is determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a command indicating a miss (step 162SGS243b). If the symbol designation command of the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a jackpot (sure jackpot A, sure jackpot B, or non-sure jackpot) (step 162SGS243b; N), the type of jackpot is identified from the symbol designation command of the entry (step 162SGS244).

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the look-ahead preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the type of jackpot identified in step 162SGS244, a look-ahead preview performance judgment table at the time of the jackpot (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead preview performance and the display pattern when the look-ahead preview performance is executed (step 162SGS245).

In step 162SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-24(A) is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 14-24(A), the determination ratio for whether or not to execute a pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notification type) is varied depending on the type of jackpot identified in the processing of step 162SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance: display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a white square (◇) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a white star (☆) in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U.

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than a sure-win jackpot C, the pre-reading preview performance will never be determined to be non-executed, and the pre-reading preview performance will always be determined to be executed, and either display pattern α or display pattern β will be determined as the display pattern (pre-notice type).

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-24(A), when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot A," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "Probable jackpot B" or "Non-probable jackpot," the rate at which display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when the variable display result is "jackpot" and display pattern β is executed as the display pattern (notice type), the probability that the jackpot type will be a special jackpot A is higher than when display pattern α is executed, and the player's anticipation of a special jackpot A can be increased.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is always decided, and either display pattern α, which displays the reserved memory display in a white square (◇), or display pattern β, which displays the reserved memory display in a white star (☆), is executed; however, this invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a "jackpot" other than a sure-win jackpot C, there may be a case where it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, just as when the variable display result is a "miss."

In addition, in step 162SGS243b, if the symbol designation command of an entry whose display pending flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a command indicating a miss (step 162SGS243b; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry whose display pending flag is on is identified (step 162SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern including normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 162SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 162SGS247, a pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) in the case where the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 162SGS248).

In step 162SGS248, the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) is made using a decision ratio such as that shown in FIG. 14-24(B), for example. In the example of setting the decision ratio shown in FIG. 14-24(B), the decision ratio as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 162SGS247.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types): display pattern α and display pattern β. When the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U in a specific form of a white square (◇), and when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U in a specific form of a white star (☆). In addition, when the pre-reading notice performance is determined to be not executed, the reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D or the second reserved memory display area 5U in a normal form of a circle (○).

As shown in FIG. 14-24 (B), when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "non-reach". Also, when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "super reach", the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is executed (the rate at which it is determined to be something other than "no preview performance") is set higher than when the variable display result is "miss" and the category of the fluctuation pattern is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable category is "other", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach". Also, if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern α being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "miss" and a decision is made to execute a foreseeing preview performance, if the variable pattern category is "other", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "non-reach", and if the variable pattern category is "super reach", the probability of display pattern β being determined is set higher than when the variable pattern category is "other".

When the variable display result is a "miss," the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined not to be executed is set to the highest, regardless of whether the variable pattern category is "non-reach," "other," or "super reach," and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14-24(A), when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the pre-reading preview performance is not determined to be non-executed (no preview performance), and the rate at which the pre-reading preview performance is determined to be executed and display pattern α or display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α or display pattern β is determined in any of the categories of variable patterns when the variable display result is a "miss."

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "Miss (non-reach)", "Miss (super reach)", or "Miss (other)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern α is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "Big hit (probable hit A)", and it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance, the rate at which display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which display pattern α is determined.

With this setting, when display pattern α or display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (preview type) of the pre-reading preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" than when display pattern α or display pattern β is not executed (displayed); in particular, when display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result is more likely to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "high probability jackpot A," which can increase the player's sense of anticipation.

After executing step 162SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 162SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, that is, whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 162SGS249).

After step 162SGS245 is executed or if it is determined that a preview performance is to be executed (step 162SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 162SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is display pattern α that indicates the pending memory display with "◇", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 162SGS245 or step 162SGS248 is display pattern β that indicates the pending memory display with "☆", the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

Also, in step 162SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 162SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white "circle" (step 162SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 162SGS251.

After executing step 162SGS246 or step 162SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 changes the value of the display pending flag of the entry to "0" (step 162SGS251). After that, the pending display is updated based on the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A (step 162SGS252). As a result, the pending memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the pending display flag set to "0", "1", or "2". In addition, even if the variable display is executed and the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted, the pending display of the first pending memory display area 5D and the second pending memory display area 5U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated according to the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A after the shift, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (A).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), if the number of first special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of first special reserved memories is two, two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of first special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D in a manner according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is one, one reserved memory display is displayed. As for the display mode of this reserved memory display, as in the case of the first special, if the flag value of the reserved display flag corresponding to the reserved memory is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○", if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and if the flag value of the reserved display flag is "2", it is displayed in the display mode of "☆". If the number of second special reserved memories is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (B), two reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory, for example, the reserved memory display of one is displayed in the display mode of "○" and the reserved memory display of one is displayed in the display mode of "☆". Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is three, three reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U in a mode corresponding to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory. Also, if the number of second special reserved memories is four, four reserved memory displays are displayed, and each reserved memory display is displayed in the second reserved memory display area 5U in a manner that corresponds to the flag value set in the reserved display flag of the corresponding reserved memory.

And each time the variable display is executed, the reserved memory is reduced (consumed), and the reserved memory display also shifts in a predetermined shift direction (towards the center of the screen in this feature part 162SG), as shown in FIG. 14-25 (B).

In other words, when the reserved memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described below, which is executed when the variable display starts, and the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A is shifted, the reserved memory display in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U is also shifted and displayed based on the reserved memory in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A after the shift, and if there is a new reserved memory due to the start winning, the display pattern of that reserved memory is determined and set in the reserved display flag, and it is displayed in the first reserved memory display area 5D and the second reserved memory display area 5U in a display mode according to the flag value set in the reserved display flag.

Note that, in this characteristic section 162SG, an example is shown in which the processing of step 162SGS252 is executed in the advance notice setting process, but the invention is not limited to this, and the processing for updating the hold displays in the first hold memory display area 5D and the second hold memory display area 5U may be executed separately as a process different from the advance notice setting process (for example, a hold display update process).

In addition, in this characteristic section 162SG, a decision is made in step 162SGS242 as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory at the start winning, on the condition that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning. However, if a start winning in the first start winning port and a start winning in the second start winning port occur simultaneously, and it is determined in step 162SGS242 that there is new storage of a command at the time of the start winning in both the first special chart and the second special chart, in other words, if an entry with the display pending flag in the on state exists in both the first special chart reserved memory and the second special chart reserved memory, then both entries are subject to the decision as to whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance. If the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the first special chart is newly stored and the pending memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special chart is newly stored are both targets for deciding whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance, if there is no entry of the pending display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, the pre-reading preview performance may be executed simultaneously in both the pending display of the pending memory of the first special chart and the pending display of the second special chart.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, as described above, when a start winning entry into the first start winning port and a start winning entry into the second start winning port occur simultaneously, both the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the first special chart is newly stored and the reserved memory in which the command at the time of the start winning entry in the second special chart is newly stored are subject to the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance, but this invention is not limited to this, and in such a case, it may be decided to execute or not execute only one of the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart and the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which high opening control is not performed, the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time-saving state in which high opening control is performed (high probability high base state/low probability high base state), the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart is given priority over the decision to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart. Then, when it is decided to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart, and when it is decided not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the second special chart, it is decided to execute or not execute the pre-reading preview performance in the reserved memory in the first special chart.

Figure 14-26 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 9. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 162SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 162SGS271 (step 162SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 162SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 162SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 162SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 162SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 162SGS272 or step 162SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 162SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 162SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 162SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334", "778", and the like, which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stop pattern. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stop pattern is determined from among "334", "778", etc., which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, the stop pattern is determined to be a decorative pattern in which three patterns are not aligned, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss pattern), and if the variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, the combination of decorative patterns (miss pattern) of reach misses, such as "121" and "464".

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs the preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 14-27 to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance in the variable display (step 162SGS277). Note that in this feature section 162SG, the preview performance determination process exemplifies a form in which it is possible to determine which of four preview performances, preview performance A to preview performance D, to be executed, as described below, but the invention is not limited to this, and the number of preview performances that can be executed may be three or less or five or more.

In the preview performance determination process of this feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the ball output state and sets a preview performance type determination table corresponding to the identified ball output state (step 162SGS290). The ball output state may be identified, for example, from the value of a flag that is turned on when a ball output state designation command is received in the command analysis process.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-28, if the performance control CPU 120 determines that the ball output state is a low ball output state, it selects table A for determining the type of advance notice performance, if the ball output state is determined to be a first high ball output state, it selects table B for determining the type of advance notice performance, and if the ball output state is determined to be a second high ball output state, it selects table C for determining the type of advance notice performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 162SGS291). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. Also, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above.

Then, a random number for determining the preview performance is extracted, and the preview performance type determination table set in step 162SG290 is used to determine whether or not to perform the preview performance and, if so, what type of preview performance to use (step 162SGS292).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the ball output state is a low ball output state, using table A for determining the type of preview performance, if the variable display result is a non-reach miss, there is an 85% chance that the preview performance will not be executed, a 10% chance that preview performance A will be executed, a 5% chance that preview performance B will be executed, a 0% chance that preview performance C will be executed, and a 0% chance that preview performance D will be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-28, when the ball output state is a low ball output state, table A for determining the type of preview performance is used, and if the variable display result is a non-reach miss, there is an 85% chance that the preview performance will not be executed, a 10% chance that preview performance A will be executed, a 5% chance that preview performance B will be executed, a 0% chance that preview performance C will be executed, and a 0% chance that preview performance D will be executed. If the variable display result is a super-reach miss, there is a 20% chance that the preview performance will not be executed, a 50% chance that preview performance A will be executed, a 30% chance that preview performance B will be executed, a 0% chance that preview performance C will be executed, and a 0% chance that preview performance D will be executed. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than jackpot C, there is a 10% chance that the preview performance will not be performed, a 25% chance that preview performance A will be performed, a 65% chance that preview performance B will be performed, a 0% chance that preview performance C will be performed, and a 0% chance that preview performance D will be performed.

Also, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state, using table B for determining the type of preview performance, if the variable display result is a non-reach miss, there is an 85% chance of deciding not to execute the preview performance, a 10% chance of deciding to execute preview performance A, a 5% chance of deciding to execute preview performance B, a 0% chance of deciding to execute preview performance C, and a 0% chance of deciding to execute preview performance D. If the variable display result is a super reach miss, there is a 20% chance of deciding not to execute the preview performance, a 50% chance of deciding to execute preview performance A, a 25% chance of deciding to execute preview performance B, a 5% chance of deciding to execute preview performance C, and a 0% chance of deciding to execute preview performance D. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than jackpot C, there is a 10% chance that the preview performance will not be performed, a 25% chance that preview performance A will be performed, a 50% chance that preview performance B will be performed, a 15% chance that preview performance C will be performed, and a 0% chance that preview performance D will be performed.

Also, when the ball output state is the second high ball output state, using table C for determining the type of preview performance, if the variable display result is a miss of no reach, there is an 85% chance of deciding not to execute the preview performance, an 8% chance of deciding to execute preview performance A, a 4% chance of deciding to execute preview performance B, a 3% chance of deciding to execute preview performance C, and a 0% chance of deciding to execute preview performance D. If the variable display result is a miss of super reach, there is a 20% chance of deciding not to execute the preview performance, a 45% chance of deciding to execute preview performance A, a 20% chance of deciding to execute preview performance B, a 10% chance of deciding to execute preview performance C, and a 0% chance of deciding to execute preview performance D. Then, if the variable display result is a jackpot other than jackpot C, there is a 10% chance that the preview performance will not be performed, a 15% chance that preview performance A will be performed, a 45% chance that preview performance B will be performed, a 20% chance that preview performance C will be performed, and a 10% chance that preview performance D will be performed.

In other words, among the preview effects in this feature section 162SG, preview effect D is set to have the highest jackpot expectation (the percentage of times the variable display result will be a jackpot), preview effect C is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than preview effect D, preview effect B is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than preview effect C, and preview effect A is set to have a lower jackpot expectation than preview effect B. And when the preview effect is not executed, the jackpot expectation is set lower than when any of the preview effects are executed (jackpot expectation: preview effect D > preview effect C > preview effect B > preview effect A > preview effect not executed).

In addition, looking at the number of preview effects that can be executed in each ball output state, there are two preview effects that can be executed in the low ball output state, preview effect A and preview effect B, three preview effects that can be executed in the first high ball output state, preview effect A, preview effect B, and preview effect C, and four preview effects that can be executed in the second high ball output state, preview effect A, preview effect B, preview effect C, and preview effect D. In other words, in this feature section 162SG, the number of preview effects that can be executed during the variable display increases as the consecutive win state continues after the first hit occurs, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the game becoming protracted during the consecutive wins.

In particular, in the second high ball output state, it becomes possible to execute preview performance D, which confirms that the variable display result will be a jackpot, so that during the variable display in the second high ball output state, the player can pay attention to whether or not preview performance D will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 14-27, after executing step 162SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has decided to execute a preview performance (step 162SGS293). If it has not decided to execute a preview performance (step 162SGS293; N), the preview performance decision process ends. If it has decided to execute a preview performance (step 162SGS293; Y), the preview performance type decided in step 162SGS292 is stored (step 162SGS294), the preview performance execution decision flag is set to ON (step 162SGS295), and the preview performance decision process ends.

After executing the preview performance determination process, the performance control CPU 120 returns to the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 14-26, and in step 162SGS278, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the preview performance execution determination flag is set to the on state, that is, whether either the preview performance "Preview performance A" or "Preview performance B" has been determined in the preview performance determination process of step 162SGS277.

If the preview performance execution decision flag is set to the ON state, the process proceeds to step 162SGS279, the preview performance start waiting timer is set to a value corresponding to the period until the preview performance starts (step 162SGS279), the preview performance execution decision flag is set to the OFF state (step 162SGS280), and the process proceeds to step 162SGS281. On the other hand, if the preview performance execution decision flag is OFF, the process proceeds to step 162SGS281 without going through steps 162SGS279 and 162SGS280.

As for the period until the start of these preview performances, in this feature section 162SG, a performance (not shown) that indicates a precursor to the execution of the preview performance is executed before the timing at which the preview performance starts, and the timing at which this precursor starts is set to the start timing of the preview performance, so a period shorter than the period until the start of the preview performance is set, and the start timing of these preview performances is determined based on the process table of the preview performance that is executed from the start of the preview performance, and the preview performance is started, but this invention is not limited to this, and in cases where these precursor performances are not executed in the preview performance, the start timing of the preview performance becomes the start timing of the preview performance, so the period until the start timing of the preview performance can be set in the preview performance start wait timer.

In step 162SGS281, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the ball output state and selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the identified ball output state and the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 162SGS282).

In addition, in step 162SGS281, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the ball output state by referring to the value of the performance ball output state flag set in the processing of step 162SGS234 of the command analysis processing.

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 162SGS283). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select a variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the specified ball output state and the variation pattern designation command (step 162SGS284). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS285). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 162SGS286).

As described above, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes the variable display start setting process, so that in this characteristic section 162SG, regardless of whether the ball output state is a low ball output state, a first high ball output state, or a second high ball output state, it is possible to execute the variable display of the decorative pattern in conjunction with the special chart variable display time. Note that in this characteristic section 162SG, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance exemplifies a form in which the CPU 120 for controlling the performance is capable of executing the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the ball output state by the value of the ball output state flag for the performance and the variable pattern designation command, but this invention is not limited to this. For example, the CPU 103 can transmit to the performance control board 12 (CPU 120 for controlling the performance) a variable pattern determination state designation command that designates in which ball output state the variable pattern designation command was determined, together with the variable pattern designation command, and the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may execute the variable display of the decorative pattern according to the ball output state each time it receives the variable pattern designation command and the variable pattern determination state designation command.

Figure 14-29 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by 1 (steps 162SGS301, 162SGS302, and 162SGS303). In addition, if the preview performance start waiting timer is set (it has been decided that a preview performance will be performed) or the preview performance execution flag is on (preview performance is being executed) (step 162SGS304; Y), the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance processing (step 162SGS305). If both the preview performance start waiting timer and the preview performance execution flag are off, the process proceeds to step 162SGS306 without executing the preview performance processing of step 162SGS305.

In step 162SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 162SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 162SGS308). In addition, the control state for the performance device (performance component) is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 162SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 162SGS309b).

Next, it is confirmed whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 162SGS310; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (screens that should be displayed 30 ms after the previous display switching of the decorative patterns) and writes it to a specified area of the VRAM (step 162SGS311). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal based on data that superimposes image data of a specified area such as a set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the change of the decorative pattern are displayed in the image display device 5. In addition, a specified value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 162SGS312).

Also, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 162SGS310; N), after executing step 162SGS312, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 162SGS313). If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that a pattern confirmation command has been received is on (step 162SGS314; Y), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special pattern hit waiting process (step S173) (step 162SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern determination command is received, the control will transition to one that stops the variation. For example, even if a variable pattern specification command is received that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, the variable display of the decorative pattern can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special pattern has ended).

The process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern contains the process data during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the processing of step 162SGS306, there is no process data to switch (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of the decorative pattern based on the process table ends.

When a preview performance is executed while the preview performance start waiting timer is set, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts and updates the value of the preview performance start waiting timer in the preview performance processing, and determines whether the preview performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the preview performance start waiting timer has timed out, i.e., if the timing for the preview performance to start has arrived, a preview performance process table corresponding to the preview performance type that has been decided to be executed is selected, and the process timer for that preview performance is started. In other words, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the first process data in the preview performance process table. In addition, the preview performance execution flag is set to ON, and the preview performance processing ends.

When a preview performance is to be executed while the preview performance execution flag is on, the performance control CPU 120 performs a subtraction update of the process timer for the preview performance and determines whether the process timer for the preview performance has timed out. If the process timer for the preview performance has not timed out, it controls the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the currently running process timer, and if the process timer for the preview performance has timed out, it switches the process data. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for the next preview performance again and controls the performance device according to the contents of the next process data. By executing the preview performance process in this manner, a preview performance can be executed during variable display.

In the above-mentioned characteristic part 162SG, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as only turning on and off, but this invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable display is being executed in the high ball output state and variable display time extension adjustment is being executed, but the jackpot period extension adjustment is not being executed because the jackpot state is not in effect, the LED may be lit in green (first mode), and when the jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed in the high ball output state and the jackpot period extension adjustment is being executed because the variable display is not being executed and variable display time extension adjustment is not being executed, the LED may be lit in red (second mode) so that it is possible to confirm (understand) which adjustment is being executed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned feature unit 162SG, as the consecutive win state continues and the value of the ball output state flag is updated from 0 to 1 to 2 (the ball output state changes from a low ball output state to a first high ball output state to a second high ball output state), the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period of the jackpot game during the consecutive win state are lengthened to reduce the number of balls output per unit time, i.e., the speed at which prize balls are awarded is slowed down. However, this invention is not limited to this. For example, in the first high ball output state and the second high ball output state, the period until the jackpot game state is controlled may be lengthened and the number of balls output per unit time may be reduced by determining the variation pattern using a high ball output state variation pattern determination table that has a higher probability of determining a variation pattern with a longer special chart variation time, such as a super reach variation pattern, than in the low ball output state.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a pre-reading preview performance in a form in which the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table for high ball output states in this way in the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, if a pending memory for a variable display that is executed after the number of remaining variable displays after determination becomes 0 occurs while the number of remaining variable displays after determination is still set to a value of 1 or more, a large difference will occur between the fluctuation pattern suggested by the performance pattern of the pre-reading preview performance and the fluctuation pattern actually selected in the variable display (for example, even though a variable display with a super reach fluctuation pattern is suggested as the pre-reading preview performance, the variable display is actually executed with a non-reach fluctuation pattern), and there is a risk that the pre-reading preview performance will become inappropriate.

Therefore, as shown in step 162SGS242a of the pre-reading preview setting process of the above-mentioned characteristic part 162SG (see Figure 14-23), when the remaining number of variable displays after the determination is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is restricted, thereby preventing a large difference from occurring between the fluctuation pattern suggested by the performance pattern of the pre-reading preview performance and the fluctuation pattern actually selected in the variable display, thereby preventing the pre-reading preview performance from becoming inappropriate.

In addition, although not specifically illustrated in this feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 refers to the value of the performance ball output status flag during the jackpot performance process shown in FIG. 9, selects a process table for fanfare performance according to the value of the performance ball output status flag, and controls the performance device according to the value of the process timer to execute a fanfare performance according to the ball output status.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated in this feature section 162SG, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an ending presentation according to the ball output state by referring to the value of the presentation ball output state flag in the ending presentation process shown in FIG. 9, selecting a process table for the ending presentation according to the value of the presentation ball output state flag, and controlling the presentation device according to the value of the process timer.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 162SG, the CPU 103 can determine whether the ball output state is a low ball output state or a high ball output state by executing the ball output state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13. When it is determined that the ball output state is a high ball output state, it is possible to lengthen the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during the jackpot game (starting adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time) by setting the value of the ball output state flag from "0" corresponding to the low ball output state to "1" corresponding to the high ball output state. In addition, after setting the ball output state flag to "1", the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" based on the execution of 100 variable displays, that is, the ball output state is updated from the high ball output state to the low ball output state, thereby returning the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during the jackpot game to the original period (ending adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time). This allows the number of prize balls paid out per unit time during a winning streak to be reduced, preventing excessive gambling caused by excessive prize balls being paid out in a short period of time.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the value of the ball output status flag is set from "0" to "1", as shown in FIG. 14-8, only the special chart variable display time of the non-reach variable pattern is lengthened, and the special chart variable display time of the normal reach or super reach variable pattern is not lengthened. This prevents an increase in the amount of data related to the variable display and prevents a decrease in interest due to the lengthening of the super reach or normal reach variable display time.

In this characteristic section 162SG, the value of the ball output status flag is set from "0" to "1" to start the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time, and the value of the ball output status flag is set back to "0" based on the execution of 100 variable displays to end the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls. However, this invention is not limited to this. For example, a time measuring means (e.g., a real-time clock or timer) is provided, and the adjustment may be ended based on the time measuring means measuring a certain time (e.g., 15 minutes, 30 minutes, etc.) from the start of the adjustment. In other words, the end condition in this invention may be "a certain time has passed during the consecutive win period since the CPU 103 set the value of the ball output status flag to "1".

Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, an example has been given of a form in which only one end condition for terminating the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time is the execution of variable displays 100 times, but the invention is not limited to this, and multiple end conditions for terminating the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time may be provided. Note that, when multiple end conditions for terminating the adjustment are provided in this manner, the adjustment may be terminated when any one end condition is met, or the adjustment may be terminated when multiple end conditions are met.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-8, when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1" or "2", i.e., when the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, the special chart variable display time in the variable pattern is set longer than when the value of the ball output state flag is set to "0" (when the ball output state is a low ball output state). Therefore, by lengthening the period required for the variable display, the time interval until the variable display result becomes a jackpot during the consecutive win state can be lengthened, and the payout speed of the prize balls during the consecutive win state can be reduced without reducing the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game state.

Also, as shown in Figures 14-20 and 14-21, during a jackpot game, when the value of the ball output status flag is set to "1" or "2", the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during which game balls cannot enter the large prize opening are set longer than when the value of the ball output status flag is set to "0". Therefore, the period during which game balls cannot enter the large prize opening between each round of play during a jackpot game can be lengthened without reducing the number of game balls that can enter during each round of play depending on the value of the ball output status flag, and the payout speed of prize balls per unit time during the consecutive win state can be reduced.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, when the value of the ball output status flag is set to "1" or "2", a total of three periods, the fanfare presentation period, the interval period, and the ending presentation period, during a jackpot game are lengthened compared to when the value of the ball output status flag is set to "0". However, this invention is not limited to this, and when the value of the ball output status flag is set to "1" or "2", any one or two of the fanfare presentation period, the interval period, and the ending presentation period during a jackpot game may be lengthened compared to when the value of the ball output status flag is set to "0".

Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, an example is given of a form in which the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period during a jackpot game are gradually lengthened by updating the value of the ball output status flag from 0 to 1 to 2, but this invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the ball output status flag is updated from "0" to "1", one or two of the fanfare presentation period, interval period, and ending presentation period may be lengthened, and when the value of the ball output status flag is updated from "1" to "2", the remaining periods may be lengthened.

As shown in FIG. 14-11, when the CPU 103 executes the game control main process at the start of the pachinko game machine 1, if the recovery condition is not satisfied, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball payout state flag to "0" corresponding to a low ball payout state, so that it is possible to prevent adjustments that reduce the payout speed of prize balls per unit time from being implemented from the start of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, if the recovery upper limit is satisfied, that is, if a power outage occurs and the pachinko game machine 1 is started again, if the value of the ball payout state flag was set to "1" or "2" at the time of the power outage, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball payout state flag to "1" or "2" again, so that adjustments that reduce the payout speed of prize balls can be resumed from the time the pachinko game machine 1 is restored from the power outage.

In addition, in this characteristic section 162SG, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage, if the value of the ball output status flag was set to "1" or "2" when the power outage occurred, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output status flag to "1" or "2" again. However, this invention is not limited to this, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 recovers from a power outage, the value of the ball output status flag may be set to "0", in other words, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls that was being performed when the power outage occurred may not be performed. In this way, the amount of data stored as backup data when a power outage occurs in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-13, if the CPU 103 determines in the ball output state determination process that the state is high, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 starts to light up under the control of the CPU 103. As a result of the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 lighting up, it can be recognized from outside the pachinko game machine 1 that an adjustment is being made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls.

In addition, in this characteristic section 162SG, the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is exemplified as a form that can be turned on by the control of the CPU 103, but this invention is not limited to this, and the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 may be an LED that can be turned on by the control of the performance control CPU 120. In this case, for example, the game control means (CPU 103) can send control information (performance control command) that can identify whether or not the high award state is in to the performance control means (performance control CPU 120), and the performance control means can be provided with a notification means (high ball output state notification LED 162SG071) that can notify that it is controlled to the high award state in response to identifying the high award state from the control information.

In addition, in this characteristic section 162SG, an example is given of a form in which a high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 is provided as notification means capable of notifying that a high award state (high ball output state) has been determined in this invention, but this invention is not limited to this, and the notification means may be sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) that notifies that a high ball output state has been determined by outputting a specific sound, image display means (e.g., image display device 5) that notifies that a high ball output state has been determined by displaying a specific image, information output means that can output information (signal) corresponding to that a high ball output state has been determined, etc.

In addition, by making the control period for turning on and off the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 the same as the control period for turning on and off the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, and the normal pattern display device 20, the CPU 103 is able to execute notification by the high ball output state notification LED 162SG071 with a common on/off control for the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, and the normal pattern display device 20.

In addition, the CPU 103 can send a ball-out state designation command to the performance control board 12 (performance control CPU 120) by executing the command control process shown in FIG. 5 after executing the sending setting of the ball-out state designation command in the ball-out state determination process shown in FIG. 14-13. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-27 and FIG. 14-28, the performance control CPU 120 can specify the ball-out state from the received ball-out state designation command in the notice performance determination process, and determine whether or not to execute a notice performance during variable display and the type of notice performance to be executed using a notice performance type determination table according to the specified ball-out state. In particular, in this feature unit 162SG, the notice performance (notice performance type) that can be executed is different when the ball-out state is a low ball-out state, a first high ball-out state, and a second ball-out state, so that the interest in playing can be increased by executing a notice performance according to these ball-out states.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, as shown in FIG. 14-28, an example is given in which the preview performances (preview performance types) that can be executed are different when the ball output state is a low ball output state, a first high ball output state, and a second ball output state, respectively. However, this invention is not limited to this, and when the ball output state is a low ball output state, a first high ball output state, and a second ball output state, the preview performances (preview performance types) that can be executed may be the same, but the determination ratio of each preview performance type may be different, or when the ball output state is a low ball output state, a first high ball output state, and a second ball output state, the executable preview performances (preview performance types) and the determination ratio of each preview performance type may be the same.

In addition, in this feature unit 162SG, a preview effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot during the variable display can be executed, and the type of preview effect that can be executed is different depending on the ball output state. However, this invention is not limited to this. For example, a high probability suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends during a jackpot game, or a continuation suggestion effect that suggests that the jackpot game will continue for up to 10 rounds during a jackpot game can be executed with multiple types of effects, and the types of effects that can be executed as the high probability suggestion effect or the continuation suggestion effect, or the determination ratio of the types of effects that can be executed may be different depending on whether the ball output state is a low ball output state, a first high ball output state, or a second high ball output state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14-23, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-reading notice setting process to execute a pre-reading notice performance that can display the reserved display of a new reserved memory generated by a start winning in multiple display patterns, and the rate at which the variable display result becomes a jackpot is changed depending on which display pattern the reserved display is displayed in. Furthermore, in this feature section 162SG, the performance control CPU 120 does not execute a pre-reading notice performance (displays the reserved display as a normal white circle) if the variable display remaining number after the judgment in the pre-reading notice setting process is equal to or less than the pre-reading limit number, so that when a pre-reading notice performance is executed for a reserved memory generated in a start winning in the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, it is possible to prevent the pre-reading notice performance from becoming inappropriate due to the ball output state changing to a low ball output state before the variable display based on the reserved memory that is the target of the pre-reading notice performance is started.

In addition, in this feature section 162SG, when the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, if the number of remaining variable displays after the judgment is equal to or less than the number of pre-reading limit times, the form is exemplified in which the pre-reading preview performance is not executed, but the invention is not limited to this, and when the ball output state is the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, the pre-reading preview performance may not be executed in a straightforward manner.

The characteristic features of this invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic features, and the invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the invention.

For example, in the characteristic part 162SG, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the fanfare performance period, interval period, and ending performance period during the jackpot game are made longer than when the ball output state is a low ball output state, and the special chart variable display time of some of the variable patterns is made longer to adjust the payout speed of the prize balls per unit time, but this invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-1, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the determination rate of the special jackpot A as the jackpot type may be lowered and the determination rate of the special jackpot B may be increased compared to when the ball output state is a low ball output state. By doing this, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the jackpot type is more likely to be determined as the special jackpot B with 5 rounds and more likely to be determined as the special jackpot A with 10 rounds, so that the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot game can be reduced, and as a result, an adjustment to reduce the payout speed of the prize balls in a high ball output state can be realized.

Furthermore, as modified example 162SG-2, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, the probability of determining a jackpot type (probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C) may be lowered and the probability of determining a non-probability variable jackpot may be increased when the ball output state is a low ball output state, making it easier to control to a time-saving state (low probability high base state) after the jackpot game ends. By doing this, in the time-saving state (low probability high base state), the probability of the variable display result being a jackpot is lower than in the probability variable state (high probability high base state), so that the end of the consecutive win state is more easily determined by executing 100 variable displays in the time-saving state, making it easier to control to the normal state, and therefore the number of consecutive jackpot games can be reduced via the high base state, and adjustments can be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state. In this case, the "means for determining the end of the advantageous period" in this invention corresponds to the part where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps 162SGS190 to 162SGS194 in the special pattern stopping process shown in FIG. 14-18 (processing to determine the value of the time-saving count counter, processing to subtract the value of the time-saving count counter, processing to re-determine the value of the time-saving count counter after subtraction, and processing to turn off the time-saving flag).

In addition, the CPU 103 of the feature unit 162SG controls the game state from a time-saving state (low probability high base state) to a normal state (low probability low base state) based on the completion of 100 variable displays after the end of a non-probability jackpot game, in other words, an example of ending the consecutive win state has been given, but the invention is not limited to this, and in a high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state), the CPU 103 may execute a fall lottery (end lottery) for the high base state each time the variable display is started in the normal processing of the special pattern, or each time the variable display is ended in the special pattern stop processing, and based on winning the lottery, control the game state to the high base state (high probability high base state, low probability high base state) or low probability low base state, in other words, end the consecutive win state. In addition, when the falling lottery is executed each time the variable display is started or ended, for example, when the ball output state is a high ball output state, it is possible to make it easier to win the falling lottery at a higher rate than when the ball output state is a low ball output state. In this way, in a high ball output state, the end of the consecutive winning state is more easily determined and it is easier to control to the normal state, so that the number of consecutive jackpot games occurring through the high base state can be reduced, and as a result, an adjustment can be realized to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball output state. In this case, the "advantageous period end determination means" of this invention corresponds to the process of executing the falling lottery when the CPU 103 starts the variable display in the normal special pattern processing or when it executes the special pattern stop processing, and the process of turning off the probability change flag or the time reduction flag when the falling lottery is won.

In addition, in the characteristic section 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on the condition that the variable display has been executed 100 times, in other words, the CPU 103 controls the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state to a low ball output state on the condition that 100 variable displays have been executed after being controlled to the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state, but this invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-3, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball output state flag to "0" based on the execution of a predetermined number of jackpot games (for example, 10 times) during the consecutive win state, in other words, the "termination condition" in this invention may be "the execution of a predetermined number of jackpot games during the consecutive win state after the value of the ball output state flag has been set to "1". In this way, the CPU 103 can reset the value of the ball output status flag from "1" or "2" back to "0" based on the number of times that the jackpot game has been executed since the value of the ball output status flag was set to "1" reaching a predetermined number (e.g., 10 times), which is the number of times the game has ended.

In addition, in the characteristic section 162SG, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag from "1" or "2" to "0" on the condition that the variable display has been executed 100 times, that is, the CPU 103 controls the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state to a low ball output state on the condition that the variable display has been executed 100 times after being controlled to the first high ball output state or the second high ball output state. However, this invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 162SG-4, the CPU 103 sets the value of the ball output state flag to "1" and then sets the value of the ball output state flag to "0" based on the total number of game balls that have entered each winning port or entered the outlet during the consecutive win state reaching a predetermined number (for example, 1000 balls). In other words, the "termination condition" in this invention may be "the number of game balls used in the game during the consecutive win state reaching a predetermined number after the value of the ball output state flag is set to "1". In this way, the CPU 103 can reset the value of the ball output status flag from "1" or "2" back to "0" based on the number of game balls used in a game reaching a predetermined number (e.g., 1,000 balls) after setting the value of the ball output status flag to "1."

In addition, in the characteristic section 162SG, when the value of the ball output state flag is "1" (first high ball output state) or "2" (second high ball output state), an adjustment is made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state by lengthening the special chart variable display time in each fluctuation pattern, but the invention is not limited to this, and an adjustment may be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high ball output state by varying the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern according to the value of the ball output state flag.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 14-30 and 14-31, variant 162SG-5 has a miss fluctuation pattern determination table A for when the ball output state flag value is "0" (low ball output state), a miss fluctuation pattern determination table B for when the ball output state flag value is "1" (first ball output state), and a miss fluctuation pattern determination table C for when the ball output state flag value is "2" (second ball output state).

As shown in Figure 14-30 (A), in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, of the possible range of 1 to 997 for the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 1 to 600 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-1, 601 to 900 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern PA2-1, and 901 to 997 is assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in Figure 14-30 (B), in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, of the possible range of 1 to 997 for the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 1 to 400 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-1, 401 to 800 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern PA2-1, and 801 to 997 is assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern PA2-2.

As shown in Figure 14-30 (C), in the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, of the possible range of 1 to 997 for the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, 1 to 200 is assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern PA1-1, 201 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach fluctuation pattern PA2-1, and 701 to 997 is assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern PA2-2.

When comparing miss fluctuation pattern determination table A and miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, miss fluctuation pattern determination table B has a lower rate of determining non-reach fluctuation patterns than miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, but has a higher rate of determining normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is a fluctuation pattern determination table that is more likely to determine fluctuation patterns with longer variable display times than miss fluctuation pattern determination table A.

In addition, when comparing miss fluctuation pattern determination table B and miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C has a lower rate of determining non-reach fluctuation patterns than miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, but has a higher rate of determining normal reach and super reach fluctuation patterns. In other words, miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is a fluctuation pattern determination table that is more likely to determine fluctuation patterns with longer variable display times than miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

In other words, among the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C has the longest average variable display time, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A has the shortest average variable display time.

As shown in FIG. 14-31, if the value of the ball output state flag is "0" and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected to determine the variation pattern, if the value of the ball output state flag is "1" and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected to determine the variation pattern, and if the value of the ball output state flag is "2" and the variable display result is a miss, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected to determine the variation pattern. In this way, by determining the variation pattern using a variation pattern determination table according to the value of the ball output state flag, an adjustment can be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high ball output state.

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, the "advantageous state" in this invention is a jackpot gaming state, and an example is given of a form in which the value of the ball output state flag is set from "0" to "1" based on the fact that the jackpot gaming state has been controlled a specific number of times (five times in the feature section 162SG) during the consecutive win state, but the invention is not limited to this, and the "advantageous state" in this invention may also include a small win gaming state. In particular, when this invention is applied to a gaming machine (a so-called small win rush machine) that can be frequently controlled to a small win gaming state during a consecutive winning state and has a game feature in which prize balls are paid out when a gaming ball enters a large winning port in these small win gaming states, an adjustment can be made to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in a high winning state by setting the value of the ball payout state flag from "0" to "1" based on the total number of times the machine was controlled to a large win gaming state and the number of times the machine was controlled to a small win gaming state during a consecutive winning state reaching a specific number (e.g., 100 times).

In addition, in the feature section 162SG, when the game is controlled to a non-variable jackpot game state, the time-saving control is executed 100 times with a variable display after the jackpot game, but this invention is not limited to this, and a non-variable jackpot may be provided in which the number of time-saving controls executed after the jackpot game is completed is less than 100 times (for example, 50 times or 30 times). In this case, when a non-variable jackpot with a time-saving control number of 50 times or 30 times is provided, the value of the ball output state flag may be set to "0" even if 100 times of variable display have not been executed since the value of the ball output state flag was set to "1". In other words, if a non-variable jackpot is won during consecutive wins, and the time-saving state following the end of the non-variable jackpot game ends without another jackpot and the game returns to normal, the adjustment to reduce the payout speed of prize balls in the high payout state may also end based on the fact that the game has entered the normal state.

In addition, this specification discloses both a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of characteristic portion 109SG is applied and a pachinko gaming machine to which the invention of characteristic portion 162SG is applied, but this invention is not limited to this, and both the invention of characteristic portion 109 and the invention of characteristic portion 162SG may be applied to one pachinko gaming machine.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 ... Pachinko game machine 5 ... Image display device 9 ... Game effect lamp 9B1 ... Lever lamp 9B2 ... Button lamp 9C ... Upper frame lamp 9M ... Left frame lamp 9N ... Right frame lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Performance control board 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Performance control CPU
131 ... Vibration motor

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
An operation means operable by a player;
A performance control means capable of executing a performance,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a reach effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific effect can be executed after the reach effect is started,
a predetermined vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means at a plurality of timings including a first timing corresponding to a start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed and a second timing prior to the start of a variable display at which the reach performance is executed;
A special vibration effect is executed by vibrating the operation means during a specific effect period, which is an execution period of the specific effect.
As the special vibration effect,
A first special vibration effect corresponding to the operation of a movable body for effect different from the operation means during the specific effect period can be executed,
A second special vibration effect corresponding to the image display during the specific effect period can be executed,
The rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the predetermined vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined vibration performance is not executed;
The predetermined vibration effect and the first special vibration effect have different aspects,
The predetermined vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The first special vibration effect and the second special vibration effect have different aspects,
The performance control means is capable of executing the predetermined vibration performance and the special vibration performance at the first timing in a common manner,
The ratio of the predetermined vibration effect at the first timing being controlled to the advantageous state is different between when the predetermined vibration effect is executed in the common mode and when the special vibration effect is executed in the common mode;
A visual guidance effect can be executed to guide the player's gaze to the operation means in a manner different from the manner in which the operation means is prompted to be operated by the player;
The gaze guidance effect is an effect of illuminating a light-emitting means corresponding to the operation means,
the light emitting means includes a first light emitting section and a second light emitting section adjacent to the first light emitting section;
The gaze guidance performance can be executed in a manner in which the first light-emitting unit is illuminated before the special vibration performance is executed, and can also be executed in a manner in which the first light-emitting unit is illuminated during the execution of the special vibration performance ,
The second light-emitting unit can be illuminated during the execution of the special vibration performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images